675189

Epson EB1460Ui Handleiding

5
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/304
Pagina verder
User's Guide
Contents
2
Notations Used in This Guide 8
Introduction to Your Projector 9
Projector Features............................................................................ 10
Unique Interactive Functions.................................................................................................... 10
Quick and Easy Setup .................................................................................................................. 10
Flexible Connectivity.................................................................................................................... 10
Connect with Computers ..................................................................................................... 11
Connect with Mobile Devices............................................................................................. 11
Easy Operation from the Control Pad ................................................................................... 12
Large-scale Presentation from the Whiteboard ................................................................ 12
Projector Parts and Functions ........................................................ 13
Projector Parts - Front/Side ....................................................................................................... 13
Projector Parts - Top/Side .......................................................................................................... 14
Projector Parts - Interface........................................................................................................... 15
Projector Parts - Base ................................................................................................................... 17
Projector Parts - Control Panel................................................................................................. 17
Projector Parts - Remote Control ............................................................................................ 18
Projector Parts - Interactive Pens ............................................................................................ 20
Projector Parts - Pen Stand........................................................................................................ 21
Projector Parts - Control Pad..................................................................................................... 21
Projector Parts - Touch Unit ...................................................................................................... 22
Setting Up the Projector 24
Projector Placement ........................................................................ 25
Projector Setup and Installation Options............................................................................. 25
Settings when Using the Interactive Features ................................................................... 26
Settings when Using the Touch Unit............................................................................... 27
Projector Connections ..................................................................... 28
Connecting to a Computer........................................................................................................ 28
Connecting to a Computer for VGA Video and Audio.............................................. 28
Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio............................................... 29
Connecting to a Computer for HDMI Video and Audio ........................................... 30
Connecting a Computer to the Control Pad................................................................. 31
Connecting to Smartphones or Tablets................................................................................ 31
Connecting to Video Sources ................................................................................................... 32
Connecting to an HDMI Video Source ............................................................................ 32
Connecting to a Component-to-VGA Video Source .................................................. 33
Connecting to a Composite Video Source..................................................................... 34
Connecting to External USB Devices ..................................................................................... 35
USB Device Projection ........................................................................................................... 35
Connecting to a USB Device ............................................................................................... 35
Connecting a USB Flash Drive to the Control Pad...................................................... 36
Disconnecting a USB Device ............................................................................................... 36
Connecting a Printer to the Control Pad.............................................................................. 36
Connecting to a Document Camera ...................................................................................... 37
Connecting an External USB Keyboard to the Control Pad .......................................... 37
Connecting to External Output Devices............................................................................... 37
Connecting to an External DVI Monitor.......................................................................... 38
Connecting to a VGA Monitor ............................................................................................ 39
Connecting to External Speakers ...................................................................................... 40
Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model ....................................................... 40
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control.................................... 43
Installing Batteries in the Pens....................................................... 44
Remote Control Operation.............................................................. 45
Using Basic Projector Features 46
Turning On the Projector ................................................................ 47
Home Screen................................................................................................................................... 48
Turning Off the Projector ................................................................ 50
Setting the Date and Time .............................................................. 51
Contents
3
Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus ......................... 53
Projection Modes ............................................................................. 54
Changing the Projection Mode Using the Remote Control.......................................... 54
Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus ............................................................ 54
Focusing the Image.......................................................................... 56
Image Shape..................................................................................... 59
Correcting the Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons .............................................. 59
Correcting the Image Shape with Quick Corner ............................................................... 60
Correcting Image Shape with Curved Surface................................................................... 62
Loading Image Shape Setting from Memory ............................................................... 64
Resizing the Image with the Buttons ............................................. 66
Adjusting the Image Position ......................................................... 67
Selecting an Image Source.............................................................. 68
Image Aspect Ratio .......................................................................... 70
Changing the Image Aspect Ratio.......................................................................................... 70
Available Image Aspect Ratios ................................................................................................. 70
Projected Image Appearance with Each Aspect Mode .................................................. 71
Color Mode ....................................................................................... 72
Changing the Color Mode ......................................................................................................... 72
Available Color Modes................................................................................................................. 72
Setting Auto Iris ............................................................................................................................. 72
Adjusting the Image Color .............................................................. 74
Adjusting the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness.................................................................. 74
Adjusting the Gamma ................................................................................................................. 75
Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons ....................... 77
Using the Interactive Features 78
Interactive Feature Modes .............................................................. 79
Preparing Before Using Interactive Features................................ 80
Safety Instructions for Interactive Features......................................................................... 80
Using the Interactive Pens ......................................................................................................... 80
Pen Calibration ......................................................................................................................... 82
Calibrating Automatically..................................................................................................... 82
Calibrating Manually .............................................................................................................. 83
Using Interactive Touch Operations with Your Finger ................................................... 85
Calibrating for Touch Operations with Your Finger................................................... 87
Safety Instructions for Interactive Touch Operations................................................ 89
Laser Warning Labels - Touch Unit................................................................................... 90
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode) ...................................... 91
Starting Whiteboard Mode........................................................................................................ 91
Safety Instructions for Whiteboard Mode...................................................................... 92
Whiteboard Mode Toolbar ........................................................................................................ 92
Whiteboard Mode Bottom Toolbar........................................................................................ 95
Projecting Scanned Images in Whiteboard Mode............................................................ 97
Compatible File Types for Opening in Whiteboard Mode ............................................ 98
Sharing Drawings Created in Whiteboard Mode.............................................................. 99
Saving Drawing Contents in Whiteboard Mode.......................................................... 99
Available File Format in Whiteboard Mode................................................................ 101
Printing Drawing Contents in Whiteboard Mode..................................................... 101
Available Printer Control Commands in Whiteboard Mode................................. 102
Sending Emails in Whiteboard Mode............................................................................ 102
Creating an Address Book ................................................................................................. 104
Available Directory Service in Whiteboard Mode..................................................... 104
Whiteboard Sharing with Other Devices........................................................................... 105
Sharing Whiteboard Screen with Other Devices ...................................................... 105
Connection to the Shared Whiteboard ........................................................................ 108
Connecting to a Shared Whiteboard from a Projector........................................... 108
Available Features when Connecting to a Whiteboard Screen .......................... 109
Connecting to a Shared Whiteboard from a Computer or Other Device via
a Web Browser ....................................................................................................................... 111
Supported Web Browsers for Sharing a Whiteboard.............................................. 112
Toolbar for Whiteboard Screen Connecting via a Web Browser ........................ 112
Draw on the Projected Image Using Annotation Mode............. 115
Contents
4
Starting Annotation Mode ...................................................................................................... 115
Annotation Mode Toolbar....................................................................................................... 116
Annotation Mode Bottom Toolbar....................................................................................... 117
Using Drawing Contents of Annotation Mode................................................................ 118
Saving Drawing Contents in Annotation Mode ........................................................ 118
Printing Drawing Contents in Annotation Mode...................................................... 118
Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen
(Computer Interactive Mode) ....................................................... 120
Computer Interactive Mode System Requirements ...................................................... 120
Using Computer Interactive Mode....................................................................................... 121
Adjusting the Pen Operation Area....................................................................................... 123
Installing Easy Interactive Driver on Mac........................................................................... 125
Switching the Interactive Mode ................................................... 126
Selecting Network Device Display ............................................... 127
Connecting to a Remote Computer ............................................. 129
Remote Desktop Connection System Requirements.................................................... 130
Remote Desktop Connection Restrictions ........................................................................ 131
Using the Interactive Features over a Network.......................... 132
Precautions when Connecting to a Projector on a Different Subnet..................... 132
Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools ............................................... 133
Enabling Windows Pen Input and Ink Features.............................................................. 133
Using Windows Pen Input and Ink Features .................................................................... 134
Interactive Features when Projecting Two Images
Simultaneously............................................................................... 135
Switching Split Screen Projection......................................................................................... 135
Selecting Split Screen Settings for the Interactive Feature ........................................ 136
Interactive Features when Projecting with Two Projectors ...... 138
Using the Interactive Features Temporarily on Only One of the Projectors........ 138
Adjusting Projector Features 140
Projecting Two Images Simultaneously ...................................... 141
Unsupported Input Source Combinations for Split Screen Projection .................. 142
Split Screen Projection Restrictions ..................................................................................... 143
Projecting a PC Free Presentation ............................................... 144
Supported PC Free File Types ................................................................................................ 144
Precautions on PC Free Projection....................................................................................... 144
Starting a PC Free Slide Show................................................................................................ 145
Starting a PC Free PDF File Presentation........................................................................... 147
Starting a PC Free Movie Presentation............................................................................... 148
PC Free Display Options........................................................................................................... 150
Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily ........................ 151
Stopping Video Action Temporarily ............................................ 152
Zooming Images............................................................................. 153
Using the Remote Control as a Wireless Mouse ......................... 154
Using the Remote Control as a Pointer ....................................... 156
Saving a User's Logo Image .......................................................... 157
Saving a User Pattern .................................................................... 159
Using Multiple Projectors ............................................................. 160
Projector Identification System for Multiple Projector Control................................. 160
Setting the Projector ID...................................................................................................... 160
Selecting the Projector You want to Operate............................................................ 161
Adjusting Color Uniformity ..................................................................................................... 162
Adjusting the Lamp's Brightness .......................................................................................... 164
Matching the Image Colors..................................................................................................... 165
Adjusting RGBCMY..................................................................................................................... 166
Projector Security Features .......................................................... 168
Password Security Types.......................................................................................................... 168
Setting a Password ............................................................................................................... 168
Selecting Password Security Types ................................................................................ 169
Contents
5
Entering a Password to Use the Projector................................................................... 170
Locking the Projector's Buttons ............................................................................................ 171
Unlocking the Projector's Buttons.................................................................................. 172
Installing a Security Cable ....................................................................................................... 172
Using the Projector on a Network 173
Wired Network Projection............................................................. 174
Connecting to a Wired Network ........................................................................................... 174
Selecting Wired Network Settings........................................................................................ 174
Wireless Network Projection ........................................................ 177
Installing the Wireless LAN Module..................................................................................... 177
Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually ............................................................... 178
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows.......................................................... 180
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Mac .................................................................... 180
Setting Up Wireless Network Security ................................................................................ 180
Supported Client and CA Certificates............................................................................ 182
Using a QR Code to Connect a Mobile Device ................................................................ 182
Using a USB Key to Connect a Windows Computer...................................................... 183
Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen
Mirroring)........................................................................................ 185
Selecting Screen Mirroring Settings .................................................................................... 185
Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 10..................................................... 187
Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 8.1 .................................................... 188
Connecting Using Screen Mirroring with the Miracast Function............................. 189
Secure HTTP.................................................................................... 190
Importing a Web Server Certificate Using the Menus .................................................. 190
Supported Web Server Certificates................................................................................ 191
Monitoring and Controlling the Projector 192
Epson Projector Management ...................................................... 193
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser ........ 194
Registering Digital Certificates from a Web Browser.................................................... 195
Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts ............................... 197
Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages ......................................................................... 197
Setting Up Monitoring Using SNMP............................................. 198
Using ESC/VP21 Commands ........................................................ 199
ESC/VP21 Command List ......................................................................................................... 199
Cable Layouts ............................................................................................................................... 199
PJLink Support ............................................................................... 201
Crestron RoomView Support ........................................................ 202
Setting Up Crestron RoomView Support........................................................................... 202
Controlling a Networked Projector Using Crestron RoomView................................ 202
Crestron RoomView Operation Window...................................................................... 203
Crestron RoomView Tools Window................................................................................ 204
Setting Projector Event Schedules............................................... 206
Adjusting the Menu Settings 209
Using the Projector's Menus ......................................................... 210
Using the Displayed Keyboard..................................................... 211
Available Text Using the Displayed Keyboard................................................................. 211
Image Quality Settings - Image Menu ......................................... 212
Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu............................................. 214
Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu ................................ 216
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu................................. 219
Extended Menu - Easy Interactive Function Menu........................................................ 222
General...................................................................................................................................... 222
PC Interactive.......................................................................................................................... 223
Extended Menu - Whiteboard Settings Menu................................................................. 224
Whiteboard Settings Menu - Basic Menu .................................................................... 224
Contents
6
Whiteboard Settings Menu - Policy Menu................................................................... 225
Whiteboard Settings Menu - Print Menu..................................................................... 226
Whiteboard Settings Menu - Save Menu..................................................................... 227
Whiteboard Settings Menu - Mail Menu...................................................................... 227
Whiteboard Settings Menu - Directory Menu............................................................ 228
Whiteboard Settings Menu - Reset Menu.................................................................... 230
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu.............................. 231
Network Menu - Screen Mirroring Settings ...................................................................... 232
Network Menu - Basic Menu .................................................................................................. 233
Network Menu - Wireless LAN Menu .................................................................................. 234
Network Menu - Wired LAN Menu....................................................................................... 236
Network Menu - Notifications Menu................................................................................... 237
Network Menu - Others Menu............................................................................................... 238
Network Menu - Reset Menu.................................................................................................. 239
Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu .......................................... 240
Projector Information Display - Info Menu ................................. 242
Info Menu - Projector Info Menu .......................................................................................... 242
Event ID Code List................................................................................................................. 243
Projector Reset Options - Reset Menu ......................................... 245
Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors (Batch Setup) ...... 246
Transferring Settings From a USB Flash Drive ................................................................. 246
Batch Setup Error Notification ......................................................................................... 247
Maintaining the Projector 248
Cleaning the Projection Window.................................................. 249
Cleaning the Obstacle Sensor....................................................... 250
Cleaning the Projector Case.......................................................... 251
Air Filter and Vent Maintenance .................................................. 252
Cleaning the Air Filter ............................................................................................................... 252
Replacing the Air Filter ............................................................................................................. 254
Projector Lamp Maintenance ....................................................... 256
Replacing the Lamp................................................................................................................... 257
Resetting the Lamp Timer ....................................................................................................... 259
Replacing the Remote Control Batteries ..................................... 261
Replacing the Interactive Pen Battery ......................................... 262
Replacing the Interactive Pen Tip ................................................ 263
Replacing the Soft Pen Tip...................................................................................................... 263
Replacing the Soft Pen Tip with the Hard Pen Tip......................................................... 264
Solving Problems 265
Projection Problems ...................................................................... 266
Projector Indicator Status ............................................................. 267
Using the Projector Help Displays................................................ 269
Solving Image or Sound Problems............................................... 270
Solutions When No Image Appears..................................................................................... 270
Solutions When Image is Incorrect Using the USB Display Function ..................... 270
Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears............................................................... 271
Displaying From a Laptop.................................................................................................. 271
Displaying From a Mac Laptop........................................................................................ 272
Solutions When "Not Supported" Message Appears .................................................... 272
Solutions When Only a Partial Image Appears................................................................ 272
Solutions When the Image is not Rectangular................................................................ 272
Solutions When the Image Contains Noise or Static..................................................... 273
Solutions When the Image is Fuzzy or Blurry .................................................................. 273
Solutions When the Image Brightness or Colors are Incorrect ................................. 274
Solutions to Sound Problems................................................................................................. 274
Solutions When Image File Names are not Displayed Correctly in PC Free......... 275
Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems....... 276
Solutions to Projector Power or Shut-Off Problems...................................................... 276
Solutions to Problems with the Remote Control............................................................ 276
Solutions to Password Problems........................................................................................... 277
Contents
7
Solution When "The Battery that Saves Your Clock Settings is Running Low"
Message Appears........................................................................................................................ 277
Solving Interactive Features Problems........................................ 278
Solutions When "Error Occurred in the Easy Interactive Function" Message
Appears........................................................................................................................................... 278
Solutions When the Interactive Pens Do Not Work....................................................... 278
Solutions When Manual Calibration Does Not Work .................................................... 279
Solutions When You Cannot Operate a Computer from the Projected Screen . 279
Solutions When the Interactive Pen Position Is Not Accurate................................... 279
Solutions When the Interactive Pens Are Slow or Difficult to Use........................... 280
Solutions When the Interactive Touch Operation Does Not Work.......................... 280
Solutions for Problems with Capturing, Printing, Saving, or Scanning.................. 280
Solutions When Inking Does Not Appear in Microsoft Office ................................... 281
Solutions for Problems with a Shared Whiteboard ...................................................... 281
Solutions When the Time Is Incorrect in Whiteboard Settings ................................. 281
Solving Network Problems ........................................................... 282
Solutions When Wireless Authentication Fails ................................................................ 282
Solutions When You Cannot Access the Projector Through the Web ................... 282
Solutions When Network Alert E-Mails are not Received............................................ 282
Solutions When the Image Contains Static During Network Projection............... 283
Solutions When You Cannot Connect Using Screen Mirroring................................. 283
Solutions When the Image or Sound Contains Static During Screen Mirroring
Connection.................................................................................................................................... 283
Appendix 285
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts............................. 286
Cables .............................................................................................................................................. 286
Mounts............................................................................................................................................ 286
For Interactive Feature.............................................................................................................. 286
For Wireless Connection .......................................................................................................... 286
External Devices .......................................................................................................................... 287
Replacement Parts...................................................................................................................... 287
Screen Size and Projection Distance............................................ 288
Supported Monitor Display Resolutions ..................................... 289
Projector Specifications................................................................. 291
Connector Specifications............................................................... 293
External Dimensions...................................................................... 294
USB Display System Requirements .............................................. 296
Easy Interactive Driver System Requirements............................ 297
List of Safety Symbols (corresponding to IEC60950-1 A2) ........ 298
Glossary .......................................................................................... 300
Notices ............................................................................................ 302
FCC Compliance Statement.................................................................................................... 302
Indication of the manufacturer and the importer in accordance with
requirements of EU directive.................................................................................................. 303
Restriction of Use........................................................................................................................ 303
Operating System References................................................................................................ 303
Trademarks.................................................................................................................................... 303
Copyright Notice......................................................................................................................... 304
Copyright Attribution................................................................................................................ 304
Notations Used in This Guide
Safety Symbols
The projector and its manuals use graphical symbols and labels to indicate content that tells you how to use the projector safely.
Read and carefully follow the instructions that are marked with these symbols and labels to avoid injury to persons or damage to property.
Warning
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly result in personal injury or even death.
Caution
This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling.
General Information Notations
Attention
This label indicates procedures that may result in damage or injury if sufficient care is not taken.
This label indicates additional information that may be useful to know.
[Button name] Indicates the name of the buttons on the remote control or the control panel.
Example: [Esc] button
Menu/Setting name Indicates projector menu and setting names.
Example:
Select the Image menu
s Image > Advanced
This label indicates links to the related pages.
s
This label indicates the projector's current menu level.
Introduction to Your Projector
Refer to these sections to learn more about your projector's features and part names.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Features" p.10
• "Projector Parts and Functions" p.13
Projector Features
10
This projector comes with this special features. Refer to these sections for
more details.
gg Related Links
• "Unique Interactive Functions" p.10
• "Quick and Easy Setup" p.10
• "Flexible Connectivity" p.10
• "Easy Operation from the Control Pad" p.12
• "Large-scale Presentation from the Whiteboard" p.12
Unique Interactive Functions
Easy annotation on the projected screen using the interactive pen or your
finger.
• Annotation with or without a computer.
• Annotation with two pens at the same time.
• Quick and easy toolbar to aid you in annotating the screen.
• Projector operations from the projected screen.
• Share your whiteboard with other devices, including tablets, smartphones,
and other projectors with whiteboard sharing capabilities.
• Scan and display content from a connected scanner.
• Email, save, or print your content without a computer.
• Import content from a USB drive.
• Remote desktop connection to control a remote computer.
• Computer operations from the projected screen.
• Touch-based interactivity using your finger (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui).
Quick and Easy Setup
• Direct Power On feature to turn on the projector as soon as you plug it in.
• Auto Power On feature to turn on the projector when the projector detects
an image signal from the port you specified as the Auto Power On source.
• Home screen feature to easily select an input source and useful functions.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
• "Turning On the Projector" p.47
• "Correcting the Image Shape with Quick Corner" p.60
Flexible Connectivity
This projector supports a wide variety of easy-to-use connectivity options as
shown below.
gg Related Links
• "Connect with Computers" p.11
• "Connect with Mobile Devices" p.11
Projector Features
11
Connect with Computers
• Connect with one USB cable to project images and output audio (USB
Display).
• Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) to project up to four images at the same
time by splitting the projected screen. You can project images from
computers on the network, or from smartphones or tablet devices on which
Epson iProjection is installed.
See the Epson iProjection Operation Guide (Windows/Mac) for details.
a
• When projecting images using a wireless LAN, you must install the
Epson 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN module, and then set up your
projector and computer for wireless projection.
• You can download the necessary software and manuals from the
following Web site:
http://www.epson.com/
gg Related Links
• "Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts" p.286
• "Connecting to a Computer" p.28
• "Using the Projector on a Network" p.173
Connect with Mobile Devices
• HDMI1/MHL port to connect an MHL cable to the mobile device and to
the projector.
• Screen Mirroring to connect your projector and mobile device wirelessly
using Miracast technology (EB-1460Ui).
Projector Features
12
• Epson iProjection (iOS/Android) to connect your projector and mobile
device wirelessly using the app available on the App Store or Google Play.
a
Any fees incurred when communicating with the App Store or
Google Play are the responsibility of the customer.
• Epson iProjection (Chromebook) to connect your projector and
Chromebook device wirelessly using the app available on the Chrome Web
Store.
a
Any fees incurred when communicating with the Chrome Web Store
are the responsibility of the customer.
gg Related Links
• "Connecting to Smartphones or Tablets" p.31
Easy Operation from the Control Pad
You can easily perform frequently used operations such as turning the power
on/off and changing the source.
You can also connect various USB devices to multiple USB ports.
Large-scale Presentation from the Whiteboard
By connecting your projector to other projectors using the DVI-D Out port,
you can easily project your whiteboard image live onto a large screen.
Projector Parts and Functions
13
The following sections explain the projector parts and their functions.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Parts - Front/Side" p.13
• "Projector Parts - Top/Side" p.14
• "Projector Parts - Interface" p.15
• "Projector Parts - Base" p.17
• "Projector Parts - Control Panel" p.17
• "Projector Parts - Remote Control" p.18
• "Projector Parts - Interactive Pens" p.20
• "Projector Parts - Pen Stand" p.21
• "Projector Parts - Control Pad" p.21
• "Projector Parts - Touch Unit" p.22
Projector Parts - Front/Side
Name Function
A
Remote receiver Receives signals from the remote control.
B
Indicators Indicates the projector's status.
C
Speaker Outputs audio.
D
Lamp cover Open to access the projector's lamp.
E
Lamp cover screw Screw to fix the lamp cover in place.
Projector Parts and Functions
14
Name Function
F
Air exhaust vent Exhaust vent for air used to cool the projector
internally.
Warning
Do not look into the vents. If the lamp
explodes, gases may escape and small
fragments of glass may be scattered which
could cause an injury. Contact a doctor if any
fragments of broken glass are inhaled or get
into the eyes or mouth.
Caution
While projecting, do not put your face or
hands near the air exhaust vent, and do not
place objects that may become warped or
damaged by heat near the vent. Hot air from
the air exhaust vent could cause burns,
warping, or accidents to occur.
G
Cable cover screws Screws to fix the cable cover in place.
H
Cable cover Loosen the two screws and open the cover when
connecting cables for external devices or installing the
wireless LAN module.
Projector Parts - Top/Side
Name Function
A
Filter cover latch Opens the air filter cover.
B
Wireless LAN
indicator
Indicates the access status of the supplied wireless LAN
module.
C
Obstacle sensor Detects obstacles that are interfering with the
projection area.
Projector Parts and Functions
15
Name Function
D
Remote receiver Receives signals from the remote control.
E
Projection window Images are projected from here.
Warning
• Do not look into the projection window
while projecting.
• Do not place any objects or put your hand
near the projection window. It could cause
burns, fire, or the object to warp because this
area reaches a high temperature due to the
concentrated projection light.
F
Interactive pen
receiver
Receives signals from the interactive pen.
G
Control panel Operates the projector.
H
Security slot The security slot is compatible with the Microsaver
Security System manufactured by Kensington.
I
Air filter cover Open to access the air filter or focus lever.
J
Air intake vent (air
filter)
Takes in air to cool the projector internally.
K
Focus lever Adjusts the image focus.
Open the air filter cover to operate.
Projector Parts - Interface
Name Function
A
Monitor Out port Outputs analog RGB signals input from the Computer
port to an external monitor. You cannot output signals
input from other ports or component video signals.
B
Video port Inputs composite video signals from video sources.
C
Audio port Inputs audio from equipment connected to the Video
port.
Inputs audio from other devices when projecting
images from the device connected to the USB-A port.
From now on, referred to as the Audio 2 port.
D
Audio Out port Outputs audio from the current input source to an
external speaker.
Projector Parts and Functions
16
Name Function
E
Audio port Inputs audio from equipment connected to the
Computer port.
From now on, referred to as the Audio 1 port.
F
Power inlet Connects the power cord to the projector.
G
HDMI1/MHL port Inputs video signals from HDMI compatible video
equipment and computers, or MHL (Mobile High-
Definition) compatible mobile devices.
This port is compatible with HDCP.
H
HDMI2 port Inputs video signals from HDMI compatible video
equipment and computers.
This port is compatible with HDCP.
I
DVI-D Out port Outputs video signals to an external monitor.
This port is not compatible with HDCP.
J
LAN port Connects a LAN cable to connect to a network.
K
USB-B port Connects a USB cable to the computer to project
computer images or to use the Wireless Mouse
function.
Connects the projector to a computer via the supplied
USB cable to use the interactive pen as a mouse.
Connects a USB cable to the control pad when
connecting a computer to the control pad.
L
USB-A port Connects a USB memory device or a digital camera
and projects movies or images using PC Free. Select
USB1 as the image source when you connect a USB
device to this port to use the projector's PC Free
features.
Connects the optional document camera. Select USB2
as the image source when you connect the document
camera to this port.
Connects a USB cable to the control pad when
connecting a USB storage device, printer, or USB
keyboard to the control pad.
Name Function
M
USB-A port Connects a USB memory device or a digital camera
and projects movies or images using PC Free. Select
USB1 as the image source when you connect a USB
device to this port to use the projector's PC Free
features.
Connects the optional document camera. Select USB2
as the image source when you connect the document
camera to this port.
Connects a USB cable to the control pad when
connecting a USB storage device, printer, or USB
keyboard to the control pad.
N
Computer port Inputs image signals from a computer and component
video signals from other video sources.
O
TCH port
(EB-1460Ui/EB-
1450Ui)
Connects the supplied Touch Unit connection cable to
the Touch Unit.
P
SYNC IN/OUT port When using the interactive features in the same room
as multiple versions of the same projector, you need to
connect the optional remote control cable set to the
projectors. When the cable set is connected, the
interactive pen operates stably.
Q
Remote port Connects to the control pad with the remote control
cable set.
R
RS-232C port Connects an RS-232C cable to control the projector
from a computer. (This port is for control use and
should not normally be used.)
S
Wireless LAN module
slot
Install the supplied wireless LAN module.
Projector Parts and Functions
17
Projector Parts - Base
Name Function
A
Ceiling mount fixing
points (five points)
Attach the optional ceiling mount here when
suspending the projector from a ceiling.
B
Rear foot fixing
points (two points)
Attach the feet when using the projector on a surface
such as a desk. (Only models with feet supplied)
Name Function
C
Security cable
attachment point
Pass a commercially available wire lock through here
and lock it in place.
Do not pass drop-prevention wires through here when
mounting the projector on a wall or suspending it from
a ceiling.
D
Wall mount fixing
points (four points)
Attach the supplied or optional setting plate when
mounting on a wall.
E
Illumination sensor Detects the brightness of the surroundings, and
automatically adjusts the brightness of the screen. Set
Power Consumption to Auto in the projector's ECO
menu.
F
Front foot fixing
point
Attach the foot with a spacer when using the projector
on a surface such as a desk. (Only models with feet
supplied)
Projector Parts - Control Panel
Projector Parts and Functions
18
Name Function
A
[Source Search]
button
Changes to the next input source.
B
[Enter] button [ ] Enters the current selection and moves to the next level
while displaying the projector's menu or help.
Optimizes Tracking, Sync., and Position in the
projector's Signal menu while projecting an analog
RGB signal from the Computer port.
From now on, referred to as the [Enter] button.
C
Keystone adjustment
buttons and arrow
buttons
Displays the Keystone screen allowing you to correct
keystone distortion.
Selects menu items while displaying the projector's
menu or help.
D
[Esc] button Stops the current function.
Moves back to the previous menu level while
displaying the projector's menu.
E
Wide/Tele buttons
and arrow buttons
: Enlarges the size of the projected image.
: Reduces the size of the projected image.
Corrects keystone distortion in the horizontal direction
when the Keystone screen is displayed.
Selects menu items while displaying the projector's
menu or help.
F
[Menu] button Displays and closes the projector's menu.
G
[Home] button Displays and closes the Home screen.
H
Power button [ ]
Turns the projector on or off.
From now on, referred to as the power button.
Projector Parts - Remote Control
Projector Parts and Functions
19
Name Function
A
Power button [ ]
Turns the projector on or off.
From now on, referred to as the power button.
B
[HDMI] button Switches the image source between the HDMI ports.
C
[Computer] button Selects the Computer port as the image source.
D
Numeric buttons Enters numbers in the projector's menu while holding
down the [Num] button.
E
[Auto] button Optimizes Tracking, Sync., and Position in the
projector's Signal menu while projecting an analog
RGB signal from the Computer port.
F
[Aspect] button Changes the aspect mode.
G
[Num] button Hold down this button to enter numbers using the
numeric buttons.
H
[Menu] button Displays and closes the projector's menu.
I
Arrow buttons Selects menu items while displaying the projector's
menu or help.
J
[Enter] button [ ] Enters the current selection and moves to the next level
while displaying the projector's menu or help.
Acts as a mouse's left button when using the Wireless
Mouse function.
From now on, referred to as the [Enter] button.
K
[User] button Performs settings assigned in the User Button setting
in the projector's Settings menu.
L
[Page] up/down
buttons
Controls page up and down on your computer when
you connect a projector and computer using a USB
cable or over a network.
Displays the previous or next screen while using the PC
Free feature.
M
[E-Zoom] +/–
buttons
Zooms in or zooms out the image area.
N
[A/V Mute] button Turns the video and audio on or off temporarily.
O
[Split] button Projects two images from different image sources
simultaneously by splitting the projected screen.
Name Function
P
Strap attachment
point
Allows you to attach a commercially available strap to
the remote control.
Q
[Home] button Displays and closes the Home screen.
R
[Freeze] button Pauses or resumes images.
S
[Volume] up/down
buttons
Adjusts the speaker volume.
T
[Pointer] button Displays the on-screen pointer.
U
[Esc] button Stops the current function.
Moves back to the previous menu level while
displaying the projector's menu.
Acts as a mouse's right button when using the Wireless
Mouse function.
V
[Pen Mode] button Changes between operating the computer or drawing
using the interactive pen.
(This button cannot be used in whiteboard mode.)
W
[ID] button Hold down this button and press the numeric buttons
to select the ID for the projector you want to operate
using the remote control.
X
[Color Mode] button Changes the color mode.
Y
[Link Menu] button Displays the settings menu for the device linked to the
projector's HDMI ports.
Z
[Whiteboard] button Turns the projector on (if necessary) and displays
whiteboard mode.
Switches to the previous input source during
whiteboard mode.
a
[LAN] button Switches the image source between the network
connected devices.
b
[Source Search]
button
Changes to the next input source.
c
Remote control light
emitting area
Outputs remote control signals.
Projector Parts and Functions
20
Projector Parts - Interactive Pens
Hold the pen to turn it on automatically. Pens turn off automatically after 15
seconds when you put them down.
Name Function
A
Pen tip Replaceable soft pen tip.
If the soft tip is hard to use on a textured surface,
replace it with the hard tip.
B
Battery indicator Press the button on the side of the pen to indicate the
remaining battery power.
• When the battery is charged, the indicator turns blue
until you release the button.
• When the battery is running low, the indicator
flashes blue until you release the button.
• Does not light when the battery is exhausted. Change
the battery.
Name Function
C
Button When Pen Button Function is set to Eraser in the
projector's Extended menu, press the button to switch
the tip function between pen and eraser while drawing.
When Pen Button Function is set to Open Drawing
Toolbar, press the button to display the toolbar near
the pen tip.
When Pen Button Function is set to Clear Screen,
press the button to erase all the contents drawn on the
projected screen.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > General
> Advanced > Pen Button Function
Press the button to perform a right-click operation
while using the pen as a mouse.
D
Strap attachment
point
Allows you to attach a commercially available strap.
E
Battery cover Open this cover when replacing the battery.
gg Related Links
• "Replacing the Interactive Pen Tip" p.263
Projector Parts and Functions
21
Projector Parts - Pen Stand
Name Function
A
Front cover Open to install the pen stand.
B
Pen tip storage space Keep the pen tips here.
C
Pen storage space Keep the pens here.
D
Battery storage space Keep the AA batteries here.
E
Screw holes (for
installation)
The screw holes for securing the pen stand.
Projector Parts - Control Pad
Name Function
A
Cable path (upper) Open the cover to route cables through here.
B
Cable path Route cables through here.
C
Screw holes (for
installation)
The screw holes for securing the control pad.
D
Power button [ ]
Turns the projector on or off.
From now on, referred to as the power button.
E
[Whiteboard] button Turns the projector on (if necessary) and displays
whiteboard mode.
Switches to the previous input source during
whiteboard mode.
F
[Source Search]
button
Changes to the next input source.
Projector Parts and Functions
22
Name Function
G
USB-B port (for
connecting a
computer)
Connects a USB cable to the computer to project
computer images or to use the interactive pen as a
mouse.
H
USB-A port (for
connecting USB
storage)
Connects a USB storage device.
I
USB-A port (for
connecting a
keyboard)
Connects an external USB keyboard.
J
USB-A port (for
connecting a printer)
Connects a USB cable to the printer.
K
USB-B port (for
connecting a
projector)
Connects a USB cable to the projector when
connecting a USB storage device, printer, or USB
keyboard to the control pad.
L
USB-A port (for
connecting a
projector)
Connects a USB cable to the projector when
connecting a computer to the control pad.
M
Remote port Connects to the projector with the cable supplied with
the control pad to power the control pad.
N
Front cover Open to connect cables.
O
Cable cover Open this cover when cables are wired along a wall.
a
Stick the supplied port protection stickers on the ports that are not
being used.
Projector Parts - Touch Unit
The Touch Unit comes with the EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui only.
Front
When the dial cover is not attached
Name Function
A
Dial cover Remove to use the adjustment dials.
B
TCH port Connects the projector to the Touch Unit with the
Touch Unit connection cable.
C
Security slot The security slot is compatible with the Microsaver
Security System manufactured by Kensington.
D
Adjustment dials Perform angle adjustments.
E
Indicator Lit when the Touch Unit is turned on.
F
Screw holes (for
installation)
The screw holes for securing the Touch Unit.
Projector Parts and Functions
23
Rear
Name Function
A
Laser diffusion ports Diffuse laser light to detect the position of fingers.
B
Installation magnets Magnets used for installation.
Warning
Do not use the Touch Unit near medical equipment such as pace makers.
Furthermore, when using the Touch Unit, make sure there is no medical
equipment such as pace makers, in the surrounding area. Electromagnetic
interference may cause medical equipment to malfunction.
Caution
• Do not use the Touch Unit near magnetic storage media such as magnetic cards,
or precision electronic devices such as computers, digital watches, or cell phones.
Data could be corrupted or a malfunction could occur.
• When installing the Touch Unit on a magnetic surface, be careful not to trap
your fingers or any other part of your body between the magnet and the
installation surface.
Attention
• Do not connect the Touch Unit to any devices except for EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui.
The device could malfunction, or laser light could leak beyond the limit.
• Make sure you use the supplied Touch Unit connection cable. Operations are
not possible with a commercially available cable.
• When disposing of the Touch Unit, do not disassemble it. Dispose according to
your local or national laws and regulations.
a
See the Installation Guide for the Touch Unit installation methods and
angle adjustment methods.
Setting Up the Projector
Follow the instructions in these sections to set up your projector.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Placement" p.25
• "Projector Connections" p.28
• "Installing Batteries in the Remote Control" p.43
• "Installing Batteries in the Pens" p.44
• "Remote Control Operation" p.45
Projector Placement
25
You can install the projector on a wall, or place it on a table to project images.
You need the optional mounts when suspending the projector from a ceiling,
installing it on a wall, or placing it vertically on a table.
Note the following points when selecting a projector location:
• Place the projector on a sturdy, level surface or install it using a compatible
mount.
• Leave plenty of space around and under the projector for ventilation, and
do not place it on top of or next to anything that could block the vents.
• Place the projector parallel to the screen.
a
If you cannot install the projector parallel to the screen, correct
keystone distortion using the projector controls.
Warning
• A special method of installation is required when suspending the projector from
a wall or ceiling. If you do not install the projector correctly, it could fall and
cause damage or injury.
• Do not use adhesives on the wall mount plate fixing points or the ceiling mount
fixing points to prevent the screws from loosening, or use lubricants, oils, or
similar substances on the projector; the projector case may crack causing it to fall
from its mount. This could cause serious injury to anyone under the mount and
could damage the projector.
• Do not cover the projector's air intake or air exhaust vents. If the vents are
covered, the internal temperature could rise and cause a fire.
• Do not install the projector on an unstable surface or in a location beyond the
weight specifications of the projector. Otherwise, it could fall or topple causing
an accident and injury.
• When installing the projector in a high position, take measures to prevent falling
by using wires to ensure safety in an emergency, such as an earthquake, and to
prevent accidents. If it is not installed correctly, it could fall causing an accident
and injury.
Attention
• If you are using the projector at altitudes above 1500 m, set the High Altitude
Mode setting to On in the projector's Extended menu to ensure the projector's
internal temperature is regulated properly.
s Extended > Operation > High Altitude Mode
• Try not to setup the projector in locations subject to high humidity and dust, or
in locations subject to smoke from fires or tobacco smoke.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Setup and Installation Options" p.25
• "Settings when Using the Interactive Features" p.26
• "Image Shape" p.59
• "Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts" p.286
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
Projector Setup and Installation Options
You can set up or install your projector in the following ways:
Front/Rear
a
Attach the feet (if supplied) when using the projector on a surface such
as a desk.
Projector Placement
26
Front Upside Down/Rear Upside Down
Front Upside Down/Rear Upside Down (Vertically)
Make sure you select the correct Projection option in the projector's
Extended menu according to the installation method being used.
a
• The default Projection setting is Front/Upside Down.
• You can change the Projection setting as follows by pressing down
the [A/V Mute] button on the remote control for about five seconds.
• Switch Front to/from Front/Upside Down
• Switch Rear to/from Rear/Upside Down
gg Related Links
• "Projection Modes" p.54
Settings when Using the Interactive Features
When using the interactive features, project from in front of the screen.
Set Projection to Front/Upside Down or Front.
Attention
The interactive features are operated using infrared communication. Note the
following points when installing the projector.
• Do not install the projector tilted at an angle of 3˚ or more. The interactive
features may not operate correctly.
• Make sure there is no strong light or sunlight shining on the interactive pen
receiver, the projection screen, the projector itself, or the rear of the projector.
• Do not install the projector where it could be subjected to direct sunlight
through a window. This could cause the interactive features to malfunction.
• Install the projector so that the interactive pen receiver is not too close to
fluorescent lights. If the surrounding area is too bright, the interactive features
may not operate correctly.
• If there is any dust stuck to the interactive pen receiver, it could interfere with
infrared communication and the interactive features may not operate correctly.
Clean the receiver if it is dirty.
• Do not put paint or any stickers on the cover of the interactive pen receiver.
• When using the interactive features, do not use an infrared remote control or
microphone in the same room. The interactive pen could malfunction.
• Do not use devices that generate powerful noise, such as rotary devices or
transformers, near the projector, as the interactive features may not operate
correctly.
Projector Placement
27
a
• We recommend using a smooth, board type screen without any
unevenness. If the projection screen is uneven, there may be
distortions in the projected image.
• Distortions may occur in the projected image depending on the
material of the screen and the installation method.
• When using the interactive features, install the projector so that the
projected screen is a rectangle without any distortion.
• When using the interactive features in the same room as multiple
projectors, interactive pen operations may become unstable. In this
case, connect the optional remote control cable set to the projectors,
and change Sync of Projectors to Wired from the projector's
Extended menu.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > General > Advanced >
Sync of Projectors
gg Related Links
• "Settings when Using the Touch Unit" p.27
Settings when Using the Touch Unit
When using the Touch Unit, install the projector using one of the following
methods (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui). The Touch Unit cannot be used if another
installation method is used.
• Mount the projector on a wall or suspend it from a ceiling and project
images from in front of the screen (the setting plate or ceiling mount is
required).
• Install vertically on a desk and project from the front of the desk (the
interactive table mount is required).
gg Related Links
• "Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts" p.286
Projector Connections
28
You can connect the projector to a variety of computer, video, and audio
sources to display presentations, movies, or other images, with or without
sound.
Attention
Check the shape and orientation of the connectors on any cable you plan to
connect. Do not force a connector into a port if it does not fit. The device or your
projector could be damaged or could malfunction.
a
See the Quick Start Guide for a list of cables supplied with your
projector. Purchase optional or commercially available cables when
necessary.
• Connect a computer that has a USB port, standard video output (monitor)
port, or HDMI port.
• For video projection, connect devices such as DVD players, gaming
consoles, digital cameras, and smartphones with compatible video output
ports.
• If your presentation or video includes sound, you can connect audio input
cables.
• For slide shows or presentations without a computer, you can connect USB
devices (such as a flash drive or camera) or the optional Epson document
camera.
gg Related Links
• "Connecting to a Computer" p.28
• "Connecting to Smartphones or Tablets" p.31
• "Connecting to Video Sources" p.32
• "Connecting to External USB Devices" p.35
• "Connecting a Printer to the Control Pad" p.36
• "Connecting to a Document Camera" p.37
• "Connecting an External USB Keyboard to the Control Pad" p.37
• "Connecting to External Output Devices" p.37
• "Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model" p.40
• "Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts" p.286
Connecting to a Computer
Follow the instructions in these sections to connect a computer to the
projector.
gg Related Links
• "Connecting to a Computer for VGA Video and Audio" p.28
• "Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio" p.29
• "Connecting to a Computer for HDMI Video and Audio" p.30
• "Connecting a Computer to the Control Pad" p.31
Connecting to a Computer for VGA Video and Audio
You can connect the projector to your computer using a VGA computer
cable.
You can play sound through the projector's speaker system by connecting a
commercially available 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack audio cable.
a
• To connect a computer that does not have a VGA video port, you
need an adapter that allows you to connect to the projector's VGA
video port.
• You can also set the port used for audio input from the projector's
menu.
s Extended > A/V Settings > Audio Output
• Make sure the audio cable is labeled "No resistance".
a
Connect the VGA computer cable to your computer's monitor port.
Projector Connections
29
b
Connect the other end to a Computer port on the projector.
c
Tighten the screws on the VGA connector.
d
Connect the audio cable to your laptop's headphone or audio-out jack,
or your desktop's speaker or audio-out port.
e
Connect the other end to the projector's Audio 1 port.
Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio
If your computer meets the system requirements, you can send video and
audio output to the projector through the computer's USB port. This function
is called USB Display. Connect the projector to your computer using a USB
cable.
a
• If you use a USB hub, the connection may not operate correctly.
Connect the USB cable directly to the projector.
• To use the USB Display function, select USB Display/Easy
Interactive Function or Wireless Mouse/USB Display as the USB
Type B setting in the projector's Extended menu.
a
Connect the cable to your projector's USB-B port.
b
Connect the other end to any available USB port on your computer.
c
Turn on the projector and your computer.
d
Do one of the following to install the Epson USB Display software:
Projector Connections
30
a
You only need to install this software the first time you connect
the projector to the computer.
• Windows: Select Run EMP_UDSE.EXE in the dialog box that is
displayed to install the Epson USB Display software.
• Mac: The Epson USB Display setup folder is displayed on your
screen. Select USB Display Installer and follow the on-screen
instructions to install the Epson USB Display software. If the USB
Display Setup folder is not displayed automatically, double-click
EPSON_PJ_UD > USB Display Installer.
e
Follow any on-screen instructions.
Do not disconnect the USB cable or turn off the projector until the
projector displays an image.
The projector displays the image from your computer's desktop and outputs
sound if your presentation contains audio.
a
• If the projector does not project any images, do one of the following:
• Windows: Click All Programs > EPSON Projector > Epson USB
Display > Epson USB Display Ver.x.xx.
• Mac: Double-click the USB Display icon in the Application folder.
• When you finish projection, do one of the following:
• Windows: Disconnect the USB cable. You do not need to operate
Safely Remove Hardware.
• Mac: Select Disconnect from the USB Display icon menu on the
menu bar or Dock, and then disconnect the USB cable.
gg Related Links
• "USB Display System Requirements" p.296
Connecting to a Computer for HDMI Video and Audio
If your computer has an HDMI port, you can connect it to the projector using
an HDMI cable and send the computer's audio with the projected image.
a
To connect a Mac that does not have an HDMI port, you need an
adapter that allows you to connect to the projector's HDMI port.
Contact Apple for compatible adapter options. Older Mac computers
(2009 and earlier) may not support audio through the HDMI port.
a
Connect the HDMI cable to your computer's HDMI output port.
b
Connect the other end to the projector's HDMI port.
a
If you have problems hearing audio through the HDMI connection,
connect one end of a commercially available 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack
audio cable to the projector's Audio port and the other end to your
computer's audio out port. Select the audio input port you connected
to in the projector's Extended menu.
s Extended > A/V Settings > HDMI1 Audio Output
s Extended > A/V Settings > HDMI2 Audio Output
gg Related Links
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
Projector Connections
31
Connecting a Computer to the Control Pad
If your computer meets the system requirements, you can send video and
audio output to the projector through the control pad's USB-B port. This
function is called USB Display. Connect the projector and your computer to
the control pad using USB cables.
a
• If you use a USB hub, the connection may not operate correctly.
Connect the USB cable directly to the control pad.
• You can also connect a computer directly to the projector's USB-B
port.
• To use the USB Display function, select USB Display/Easy
Interactive Function or Wireless Mouse/USB Display as the USB
Type B setting in the projector's Extended menu.
a
Connect the projector to the control pad.
b
Turn on the projector and your computer.
c
Connect another USB cable to the USB-B port on the bottom of the
control pad and any available USB port on your computer.
d
Do one of the following to install the Epson USB Display software:
a
You only need to install this software the first time you connect
the projector to the computer.
• Windows: Select Run EMP_UDSE.EXE in the dialog box that is
displayed to install the Epson USB Display software.
• Mac: The Epson USB Display setup folder is displayed on your
screen. Select USB Display Installer and follow the on-screen
instructions to install the Epson USB Display software. If the USB
Display Setup folder is not displayed automatically, double-click
EPSON_PJ_UD > USB Display Installer.
e
Follow any on-screen instructions.
Do not disconnect the USB cable or turn off the projector until the
projector displays an image.
The projector displays the image from your computer's desktop and outputs
sound if your presentation contains audio.
a
• If the projector does not project any images, do one of the following:
• Windows: Click All Programs > EPSON Projector > Epson USB
Display > Epson USB Display Ver.x.xx.
• Mac: Double-click the USB Display icon in the Application folder.
• When you finish projection, do one of the following:
• Windows: Disconnect the USB cable. You do not need to operate
Safely Remove Hardware.
• Mac: Select Disconnect from the USB Display icon menu on the
menu bar or Dock, and then disconnect the USB cable.
Connecting to Smartphones or Tablets
You can connect the projector to smartphones and tablets using a MHL cable
and send the audio with the projected image.
Projector Connections
32
a
• You may not be able to project correctly, depending on the model
and settings of the smartphone or tablet.
• You may not be able to connect an MHL cable to all devices. Contact
the manufacturer of your smartphone or tablet device to check if
your device supports MHL.
a
Connect the MHL cable to your device's Micro-USB port.
b
Connect the other end to the projector's HDMI1/MHL port.
Attention
If you connect an MHL cable that does not support the MHL standards, the
smartphone or tablet device may become hot, or leakage or explosion may
happen.
The connected smartphone or tablet begins charging when images are
projected. If you connect using a MHL-HDMI conversion adapter,
charging the smartphone or tablet device may not work or you may not
be able to perform operations using the projector's remote control.
a
• Charging may not work when using a lot of power, such as
when playing a movie.
• Charging does not work when the projector is in standby mode
or the battery in a smartphone or tablet is depleted.
a
If images are not projected correctly, disconnect and then reconnect
the MHL cable.
Connecting to Video Sources
Follow the instructions in these sections to connect video devices to the
projector.
a
• If the port on the device you connect has an unusual shape, use the
cable supplied with the device or an optional cable to connect to the
projector.
• The cable differs depending on the output signal from the connected
video devices.
• Some video devices are capable of outputting different types of
signals. See your video device manual to confirm what type of signals
can be output.
gg Related Links
• "Connecting to an HDMI Video Source" p.32
• "Connecting to a Component-to-VGA Video Source" p.33
• "Connecting to a Composite Video Source" p.34
Connecting to an HDMI Video Source
If your video source has an HDMI port, you can connect it to the projector
using an HDMI cable and send the image source's audio with the projected
image.
Projector Connections
33
Attention
Do not turn on the video source before connecting it to the projector. Doing so
could damage the projector.
a
Connect the HDMI cable to your video source's HDMI output port.
b
Connect the other end to the projector's HDMI port.
a
If you have problems hearing audio through the HDMI connection,
connect one end of a commercially available 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack
audio cable to the projector's Audio port and the other end to your
video source's audio out port. Select the audio input port you
connected to in the projector's Extended menu.
s Extended > A/V Settings > HDMI1 Audio Output
s Extended > A/V Settings > HDMI2 Audio Output
gg Related Links
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
Connecting to a Component-to-VGA Video Source
If your video source has component video ports, you can connect it to the
projector using a component-to-VGA video cable. Depending on your
component ports, you may need to use an adapter cable along with a
component video cable.
You can play sound through the projector's speaker system by connecting a
stereo mini-jack audio cable.
a
• You can also set the port used for audio input in the projector's
Extended menu.
s Extended > A/V Settings > Audio Output
• Make sure the audio cable is labeled "No resistance".
a
Connect the component connectors to your video source's color-coded
component video output ports.
a
The ports usually labeled Y, Pb, Pr or Y, Cb, Cr. If you are using
an adapter, connect these connectors to your component video
cable.
b
Connect the VGA connector to a Computer port on the projector.
Projector Connections
34
c
Tighten the screws on the VGA connector.
d
Connect the audio cable to your video source's audio-out ports.
e
Connect the other end to the projector's Audio 1 port.
If your image colors appear incorrectly, you may need to change the Input
Signal setting in the projector's Signal menu.
gg Related Links
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu" p.214
Connecting to a Composite Video Source
If your video source has a composite video port, you can connect it to the
projector using a RCA-style video or A/V cable.
You can play sound through the projector's speaker system by connecting a
stereo mini-jack audio cable.
a
Make sure the audio cable is labeled "No resistance".
a
Connect the cable with the yellow connector to your video source's
yellow video output port.
b
Connect the other end to the projector's Video port.
c
Connect the audio cable to your video source's audio-out ports.
d
Connect the other end to the projector's Audio 2 port.
Projector Connections
35
Connecting to External USB Devices
Follow the instructions in these sections to connect external USB devices to
the projector.
gg Related Links
• "USB Device Projection" p.35
• "Connecting to a USB Device" p.35
• "Connecting a USB Flash Drive to the Control Pad" p.36
• "Disconnecting a USB Device" p.36
USB Device Projection
You can project images and other content without using a computer or video
device by connecting any of these devices to your projector:
• USB flash drive
• Digital camera or smartphone
• USB hard drive
• Multimedia storage viewer
a
• Digital cameras or smartphones must be USB-mounted devices, not
TWAIN-compliant devices, and must be USB Mass Storage Class-
compliant.
• USB hard drives must meet these requirements:
• USB Mass Storage Class-compliant (not all USB Mass Storage
Class devices are supported)
• Formatted in FAT16/32
• Self-powered by their own AC power supplies (bus-powered hard
drives are not recommended)
• Avoid using hard drives with multiple partitions
You can project slide shows from image files on a connected USB device.
gg Related Links
• "Projecting a PC Free Presentation" p.144
Connecting to a USB Device
You can connect your USB device to the projector's USB-A port and use it to
project images and other content.
a
If your USB device came with a power adapter, plug the device into an
electrical outlet.
b
Connect the USB cable or USB flash drive to the projector's USB-A port
as shown.
Attention
• Use the USB cable supplied with or specified for use with the device.
• Do not connect a USB hub or a USB cable longer than 3 meters, or the
device may not operate correctly.
a
Select USB1 as the image source when you connect a USB device
to one of the USB-A ports.
c
Connect the other end to your device, if necessary.
Projector Connections
36
Connecting a USB Flash Drive to the Control Pad
You can connect your USB flash drive to the USB-A port on the control pad
and use it to project images and other content.
a
You can also connect a USB flash drive directly to the projector's USB-
A port.
a
Connect the projector to the control pad.
b
Connect the USB flash drive into the USB-A port on the bottom of the
control pad.
a
Select USB1 as the image source to project images on the USB
flash drive.
Disconnecting a USB Device
When you have finished presenting with a connected USB device, disconnect
the device from the control pad or projector.
a
Turn off and unplug the device, if necessary.
b
Disconnect the USB device from the control pad or projector.
Connecting a Printer to the Control Pad
You can connect an Epson printer or all-in-one device to the Printer port
(USB-A port) on the control pad and use it to print your projected and
annotated content from the whiteboard.
a
• Make sure the printer meets the control command requirements.
• You can also connect a printer directly to the projector's USB-A port.
• You can also connect a network printer through the Whiteboard
Settings menu.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings > Print
a
Connect the projector to the control pad.
Projector Connections
37
b
Connect another USB cable to the Printer port (USB-A port) on the
control pad. Make sure the cable is no longer than 5 m.
c
Connect the other end of the cable to the USB type B port on the
printer.
Connecting to a Document Camera
You can connect a document camera to your projector to project images
viewed by the camera.
The connection method varies depending on your Epson document camera
model. See the document camera manual for details.
a
• You cannot connect a document camera to the control pad.
• Select USB2 as the image source when you connect a USB document
camera to one of the USB-A ports.
• You cannot use multiple USB document cameras at the same time.
Connecting an External USB Keyboard to the Control
Pad
You can connect an external USB keyboard to the USB-A port on the control
pad and use it to enter numbers and characters.
a
• The English keyboard (101 keyboard) is supported.
• You can only use the connected keyboard to configure the remote
desktop connection settings for a remote computer.
a
Connect the projector to the control pad.
b
Connect the keyboard's cable to your control pad's USB-A port.
Connecting to External Output Devices
Follow the instructions in these sections to connect external devices to the
projector.
gg Related Links
• "Connecting to an External DVI Monitor" p.38
• "Connecting to a VGA Monitor" p.39
• "Connecting to External Speakers" p.40
Projector Connections
38
Connecting to an External DVI Monitor
You can connect an external DVI monitor to the projector's DVI-D Out port.
If you connect your projector to another projector using the DVI-D Out port,
you can easily project your presentation onto a large screen.
Attention
Do not turn on the DVI monitor or other large-size projectors before connecting
them to the projector. Doing so could damage the projector.
a
• Images cannot be output to an external DVI monitor when the
projector is turned off.
• The refresh interval of the image displayed on the DVI monitor
varies depending on the image source.
• The image from the whiteboard refreshes in real time.
• Images from sources other than the whiteboard refresh every three
seconds.
• When performing split screen projection, and if you do not want to
display images from the HDMI2 port, select Off as the HDMI2 Out
(Split Screen) setting in the projector's Extended menu.
s Extended > A/V Settings > HDMI2 Out (Split Screen)
• When the message "DVI Output function has been disabled at the
A/V Settings > DVI Output setting in the projector's Extended
menu." is displayed, set the DVI Output setting to Whiteboard or
Projected Image in the projector's Extended menu.
s Extended > A/V Settings > DVI Output
• The following images cannot be displayed on the DVI monitor. A
message is displayed on the screen, and then the screen blacks out.
• Images protected by HDCP
• Images that cannot be displayed on external monitors such as the
Home screen
• When the projector is busy, images cannot be displayed on the DVI
monitor. A message is displayed on the screen, and then the screen
blacks out.
a
Connect the DVI-D 24-pin cable to the projector's DVI-D Out port.
b
Connect the other end to your monitor's DVI-D port.
c
Select the Extended menu and press [Enter].
Projector Connections
39
d
Select the A/V Settings setting and press [Enter].
e
Select DVI Output and press [Enter].
f
Select the image source you want to display on the DVI monitor.
• Whiteboard: Displays whiteboard screen.
• Projected Image: Displays currently projected image source.
g
Press [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Connecting to a VGA Monitor
If you connected the projector to a computer using a Computer port, you can
also connect an external monitor to the projector. This lets you see your
presentation on the external monitor even when the projected image is not
visible.
a
• If you want to output images to an external monitor when the
projector is turned off, you need to do the following:
• Select Communication On as the Standby Mode setting in the
projector's ECO menu.
• Select Always On as the A/V Output setting in the projector's
Extended menu.
s Extended > A/V Settings > A/V Output
• Content drawn on the screen using the interactive features is not
displayed on an external monitor. To display the drawn content on
an external monitor, use the supplied Easy Interactive Tools.
• Monitors that use a refresh rate of less than 60 Hz may not be able to
display images correctly.
a
Make sure your computer is connected to the projector's Computer
port.
a
• Only analog RGB signals from the Computer port can be
output to an external monitor. You cannot output signals
input from other ports or component video signals.
b
Connect the external monitor's cable to your projector's Monitor Out
port.
Projector Connections
40
Connecting to External Speakers
To enhance the sound from your presentation, you can connect the projector
to external self-powered speakers. You can control the volume using the
projector's remote control.
a
• If you want to output audio from the external speakers when the
projector is turned off, you need to do the following:
• Select Communication On as the Standby Mode setting in the
projector's ECO menu.
• Select Always On as the A/V Output setting in the projector's
Extended menu.
s Extended > A/V Settings > A/V Output
• You can also connect the projector to an amplifier with speakers.
• The projector's built-in speaker system is disabled when you connect
external speakers.
a
Make sure your computer or video source is connected to the projector
with both audio and video cables as necessary.
b
Locate the appropriate cable to connect your external speakers, such as
a stereo mini-jack-to-pin-jack cable, or another type of cable or adapter.
c
Connect one end of the cable to your external speakers as necessary.
d
Connect the stereo mini-jack end of the cable to your projector's Audio
Out port.
Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model
If you use the interactive features of multiple projectors of the same model in
the same room, you need to synchronize the projectors. To do this, connect
the optional remote control cable set to the SYNC port on each projector.
a
Connect one end of the cable to the SYNC IN port on one projector,
and connect the other end to the SYNC OUT port on the other
projector.
Projector Connections
41
a
If you are connecting three or more projectors, connect the
projectors in a chain as shown.
b
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
c
Select the Extended menu and press [Enter].
d
Select the Easy Interactive Function setting and press [Enter].
e
In the General section, select Advanced, and then press [Enter].
Projector Connections
42
f
Select Sync of Projectors and press [Enter].
g
Select Wired and press [Enter].
h
Press [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
a
• If you are using the projector in the same room as another
projector that does not support cable connection, set the
Wired Sync Mode setting to Mode 2 in the projector's
Extended menu.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > General >
Advanced > Wired Sync Mode
• If you do not have the optional remote control cable set,
change the Distance of Projectors setting in the projector's
Extended menu.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > General >
Advanced > Distance of Projectors
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control
43
The remote control uses the two AA batteries that came with the projector.
Attention
Make sure you read the Safety Instructions before handling the batteries.
a
Remove the battery cover as shown.
b
Insert the batteries with the + and – ends facing as shown.
Warning
Check the positions of the (+) and (–) marks inside the battery holder to
ensure the batteries are inserted the correct way. If the batteries are not used
correctly, they could explode or leak causing a fire, injury, or damage to the
product.
c
Replace the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.
Installing Batteries in the Pens
44
Each pen uses one AA battery.
Attention
Make sure you read the Safety Instructions before handling the battery.
a
Open the battery cover as shown.
b
Insert the battery with the + and – ends facing as shown.
Warning
Check the positions of the (+) and (–) marks inside the battery holder to
ensure the battery are inserted the correct way. If the battery is not used
correctly, it could explode or leak causing a fire, injury, or damage to the
product.
c
Replace the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.
Remote Control Operation
45
The remote control lets you control the projector from almost anywhere in
the room.
Make sure that you aim the remote control at the projector's receivers within
the distance and angles listed here.
a
Avoid using the remote control in conditions with bright fluorescent
lights or in direct sunlight, or the projector may not respond to
commands. If you are not going to use the remote control for a long
time, remove the batteries.
Using Basic Projector Features
Follow the instructions in these sections to use your projector's basic features.
gg Related Links
• "Turning On the Projector" p.47
• "Turning Off the Projector" p.50
• "Setting the Date and Time" p.51
• "Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus" p.53
• "Projection Modes" p.54
• "Focusing the Image" p.56
• "Image Shape" p.59
• "Resizing the Image with the Buttons" p.66
• "Adjusting the Image Position" p.67
• "Selecting an Image Source" p.68
• "Image Aspect Ratio" p.70
• "Color Mode" p.72
• "Adjusting the Image Color" p.74
• "Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons" p.77
Turning On the Projector
47
Turn on the computer or video equipment you want to use after you turn on
the projector.
a
Connect the power cord to the projector's power inlet and plug it into
an electrical outlet.
The projector's power indicator turns blue. This indicates that the
projector is receiving power, but is not yet turned on (it is in standby
mode).
b
Press the power button on the control panel or remote control to turn
on the projector.
The projector beeps and the status indicator flashes blue as the
projector warms up. Once the projector is warmed up, the status
indicator stops flashing and turns blue.
a
• You can also press the power button on the control pad.
Try the following if you do not see a projected image.
• Turn on the connected computer or video device.
• Change the screen output from the computer when using a laptop
computer.
• Insert a DVD or other video media, and press play (if necessary).
• Press the [Source Search] button on the control pad, remote control, or
control panel to detect the source.
• Press the button for the desired video source on the remote control.
• If the Home screen is displayed, select the source you want to project.
Turning On the Projector
48
Warning
• Never look into the projector lens when the lamp is on. This can damage your
eyes and is especially dangerous for children.
• When turning on the projector at a distance using the remote control, make sure
there is no one looking into the lens.
• During projection, do not block the light from the projector with a book or other
objects. If the light from the projector is blocked, the area on which the light
shines becomes hot which could cause it to melt, burn, or start a fire. Also, the
lens may get hot due to the reflected light which could cause the projector to
malfunction. To stop projection, use the A/V Mute function, or turn off the
projector.
• A mercury lamp with high internal pressure is used as the projector's light
source. If the lamp is subjected to vibrations or shocks, or if it is used for an
overly extended length of time, the lamp may break or it may not turn on. If the
lamp explodes, gases may escape and small fragments of glass may be scattered
which could cause an injury. Be sure to observe the instructions below.
• Do not disassemble or damage the lamp or subject it to any impacts.
• Do not bring your face close to the projector while it is in use.
• Particular care should be taken when the projector is installed to a wall or
ceiling, as small pieces of glass may fall down when the lamp cover is removed.
When cleaning the projector or replacing the lamp yourself, be very careful
not to allow such pieces of glass to get into the eyes or mouth.
If the lamp breaks, ventilate the area immediately, and contact a doctor if any
fragments of broken glass are inhaled or get into the eyes or mouth.
a
• When the Direct Power On setting is set to On in the projector's
Extended menu, the projector turns on as soon as you plug it in.
Note that the projector also turns on automatically in cases such as
recovery from a power outage.
s Extended > Operation > Direct Power On
• If you select a specific port as the Auto Power On setting in the
projector's Extended menu, the projector turns on as soon as it
detects a signal or cable connection from that port.
s Extended > Operation > Auto Power On
gg Related Links
• "Home Screen" p.48
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
• "Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu" p.240
Home Screen
The Home screen feature allows you to easily select an image source and
access useful functions. You can display the Home screen by pressing the
[Home] button on the control panel or remote control. The Home screen is
also displayed when you turn on the projector and no signal is being input.
Press the arrow buttons on the control panel or remote control to select a
menu item, and then press [Enter].
You can also select menu items using the interactive pen or your finger (EB-
1460Ui/EB-1450Ui).
A
Displays a description of the function.
B
Starts whiteboard mode.
Turning On the Projector
49
C
Shares your whiteboard screen with other devices, or connects to a shared
projector to view the whiteboard screen.
D
Connects to a remote computer and allows you to control it.
E
Displays the QR code and projects data on a smartphone or tablet device.
F
Displays the projector's Help screen.
G
Closes the Home screen.
H
Makes temporary settings for the interactive features.
I
Performs menu options assigned to Home Screen in the projector's Extended
menu.
a
The Home screen disappears after 10 minutes of inactivity.
gg Related Links
• "Image Shape" p.59
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
• "Using a QR Code to Connect a Mobile Device" p.182
• "Using the Projector's Menus" p.210
• "Using the Projector Help Displays" p.269
• "Connecting to a Computer" p.28
Turning Off the Projector
50
Turn off the projector after use.
Attention
Do not unplug the power cord while the projector is turned on. Data on the
whiteboard may be lost.
a
• Turn off this product when it is not in use to prolong the life of the
projector. Lamp life varies depending on the mode selected,
environmental conditions, and usage. Brightness decreases over time.
• If Auto Delete Saved Data is set to Retain in the Extended menu,
you can select whether or not to clear the data on the whiteboard
when you turn off the projector.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings > Policy
a
Press the power button on the control panel or remote control.
a
You can also press the power button on the control pad.
The projector displays a shutdown confirmation screen.
b
Press the power button again. (To leave it on, press any other button.)
The projected image disappears, the projector beeps twice, and the
status indicator turns off.
c
To transport or store the projector, make sure the power indicator is
blue (but not flashing) and the status indicator is off, then unplug the
power cord.
Setting the Date and Time
51
You can set the date and time for the projector.
a
Turn on the projector.
b
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
c
Select the Extended menu and press [Enter].
d
Select the Operation setting and press [Enter].
e
Select the Date & Time setting and press [Enter].
You see this screen:
f
Select the Date & Time setting and press [Enter].
You see this screen:
g
Select Date, press [Enter], and use the displayed keyboard to enter
today's date.
h
Select Time, press [Enter], and use the displayed keyboard to enter the
current time.
i
Select Time Difference (UTC), press [Enter], and set the time
difference from Coordinated Universal Time.
j
When you are finished, select Set and press [Enter].
Setting the Date and Time
52
k
To activate daylight saving time, select the Daylight Saving Time
setting and press [Enter]. Then select settings.
l
When you are finished, select Set and press [Enter].
m
To update the time automatically through an Internet time server,
select the Internet Time setting and press [Enter]. Then select settings.
n
When you are finished, select Set and press [Enter].
o
Press [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus
53
If you want to view the projector's menus and messages in another language,
you can change the Language setting.
a
Turn on the projector.
b
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
c
Select the Extended menu and press [Enter].
d
Select the Language setting and press [Enter].
e
Select the language you want to use and press [Enter].
f
Press [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Projection Modes
54
Depending on how you positioned the projector, you may need to change the
projection mode so your images project correctly.
• Front lets you project from a table in front of the screen.
• Front/Upside Down (default setting) flips the image over top-to-bottom to
project upside-down from a ceiling or wall mount.
• Rear flips the image horizontally to project from behind a translucent
screen.
• Rear/Upside Down flips the image over top-to-bottom and horizontally to
project from a ceiling or wall mount and behind a translucent screen.
gg Related Links
• "Changing the Projection Mode Using the Remote Control" p.54
• "Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus" p.54
• "Projector Setup and Installation Options" p.25
Changing the Projection Mode Using the Remote
Control
You can change the projection mode to flip the image over top-to-bottom.
a
Turn on the projector and display an image.
b
Hold down the [A/V Mute] button on the remote control for 5 seconds.
The image disappears briefly and reappears flipped top-to-bottom.
c
To change projection back to the original mode, hold down the [A/V
Mute] button for 5 seconds again.
Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus
You can change the projection mode to flip the image over top-to-bottom
and/or left-to-right using the projector menus.
a
Turn on the projector and display an image.
b
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
Projection Modes
55
c
Select the Extended menu and press [Enter].
d
Select Projection and press [Enter].
e
Select a projection mode and press [Enter].
f
Press [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Focusing the Image
56
You can display the test pattern, and then adjust the focus.
a
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
b
Select the Settings menu and press [Enter].
c
Select Pattern and press [Enter].
d
Select Test Pattern and press [Enter].
Focusing the Image
57
e
Open the air filter cover.
f
Move the focus lever and focus to the center-bottom of the projected
screen.
Focusing the Image
58
g
Check that the focus matches the corners of the projected screen.
a
If any areas are out of focus, use the focus lever to adjust until
the corners are the same focus.
h
To remove the test pattern, press the [Esc] button on the remote
control or the control panel.
Image Shape
59
You can project an even, rectangular image by placing the projector directly
in front of the center of the screen and keeping it level. If you place the
projector at an angle to the screen, or tilt it up or down, or off to the side, you
may need to correct the image shape.
a
You cannot correct an image shape using multiple correction methods
at the same time.
gg Related Links
• "Correcting the Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons" p.59
• "Correcting the Image Shape with Quick Corner" p.60
• "Correcting Image Shape with Curved Surface" p.62
Correcting the Image Shape with the Keystone
Buttons
You can use the projector's keystone correction buttons to correct the shape
of an image that is unevenly rectangular.
You can use keystone buttons to correct images up to 3º right, left, up, or
down.
a
Turn on the projector and display an image.
b
Press one of the keystone adjustment buttons on the control panel to
display the Keystone adjustment screen.
Image Shape
60
c
Press a keystone button to adjust the image shape.
After correction, your image is slightly smaller.
a
If the projector is installed out of your reach, you can also correct
the shape of the image using the remote control.
s Settings > Geometry Correction > H/V-Keystone
gg Related Links
• "Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu" p.216
Correcting the Image Shape with Quick Corner
You can use the projector's Quick Corner setting to correct the shape and size
of an image that is unevenly rectangular.
a
Turn on the projector and display an image.
b
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
Image Shape
61
c
Select the Settings menu and press [Enter].
d
Select Geometry Correction and press [Enter].
e
Select Quick Corner and press [Enter]. Press [Enter] again if necessary.
You see the area selection screen.
f
Use the arrow buttons to select the corner of the image you want to
adjust. Then press [Enter].
a
To reset the Quick Corner corrections, hold down [Esc] for
about two seconds while the area selection screen is displayed,
and then select Yes.
g
Press the arrow buttons to adjust the image shape as necessary.
To return to the area selection screen, press [Enter].
Image Shape
62
a
• If you see this screen, you cannot adjust the shape any further
in the direction indicated by the gray triangle.
h
Repeat steps 6 and 7 as needed to adjust any remaining corners.
i
When you are finished, press [Esc].
The Geometry Correction setting is now set to Quick Corner in the
projector's Settings menu. The next time you press the keystone adjustment
buttons on the control panel, the area selection screen is displayed.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu" p.216
Correcting Image Shape with Curved Surface
You can use the projector's Arc Correction setting to adjust the shape of an
image projected on a curved or spherical surface.
a
Turn on the projector and display an image.
b
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
Image Shape
63
c
Select the Settings menu and press [Enter].
d
Select Geometry Correction and press [Enter].
e
Select Arc Correction and press [Enter].
f
Select Arc Correction and press [Enter].
You see the area selection screen.
g
Use the arrow buttons to select the area of the image you want to
adjust, then press [Enter].
Image Shape
64
a
To reset the Arc Correction settings, hold down [Esc] for about
two seconds while the area selection screen is displayed, and then
select Yes.
h
Press the arrow buttons to adjust the image shape of the selected area as
necessary.
To return to the area selection screen, press [Enter].
a
If you see this screen, you cannot adjust the shape any further in
the direction indicated by the gray triangle.
i
Repeat steps 7 and 8 as needed to adjust any remaining areas.
j
When you are finished, press [Esc].
a
To save the current shape of an image you have adjusted, select
Save Memory in the Arc Correction setting. You can save up to
three image shapes in the Arc Correction memory.
gg Related Links
• "Loading Image Shape Setting from Memory" p.64
Loading Image Shape Setting from Memory
You can load the settings you made and saved in the Arc Correction setting.
a
Before loading the memory, make sure the Geometry Correction
setting is set to Arc Correction in the projector's Settings menu.
a
Turn on the projector and display an image.
Image Shape
65
b
Hold down the [Num] button on the remote control, and then press
the numeric button (1, 2, or 3) that matches the number of the saved
setting.
a
The illustration above is only an example.
c
When you have finished loading the settings, follow the on-screen
instructions.
a
• You can also load the settings from Load Memory in the projector's
Settings menu.
• When an MHL compatible mobile device is connected to the
projector, load the settings from Load Memory in the projector's
Settings menu.
s Settings > Geometry Correction > Arc Correction > Load
Memory
Resizing the Image with the Buttons
66
You can resize the image using the Wide and Tele buttons.
a
Turn on the projector and display an image.
b
Press the Wide button on the projector's control panel to enlarge the
image size. Press the Tele button to reduce the image size.
a
You can also adjust the Zoom setting in the projector's Settings
menu.
Adjusting the Image Position
67
You can use the Image Shift feature to adjust the image position without
moving the projector.
a
• This feature is not available if the Zoom option is set to the widest
setting.
a
Turn on the projector and display an image.
b
Adjust the image size using the Wide and Tele buttons.
After you adjust the image size, the Image Shift screen is displayed
automatically.
c
Use the arrow buttons on the projector or remote control to adjust the
image position.
a
You can shift the image diagonally by pressing any pair of
adjacent arrow buttons on the control panel or remote control.
d
Press the [Esc] button to close the adjustment screen.
The adjustment screen disappears if no operation is performed after
approximately 10 seconds.
a
• The Image Shift setting is retained even if the projector is turned off.
You need to re-adjust the position if you change the installation
location or angle of the projector.
• You can also use the Settings menu to adjust the Image Shift setting.
Selecting an Image Source
68
When multiple image sources are connected to the projector, such as a
computer and DVD player, you can switch from one image source to the
other.
a
Make sure the connected image source you want to use is turned on.
b
For video image sources, insert a DVD or other video media and press
play.
c
Do one of the following:
• Press the [Source Search] button on the control panel, remote
control, or control pad until you see the image from the source you
want.
a
This screen is displayed when no image signal is detected.
Check the cable connections between the projector and image
source.
• Press the button for the source you want on the remote control. If
there is more than one port for that source, press the button again to
cycle through the sources.
A
HDMI and MHL sources (HDMI1/MHL and HDMI2 ports)
B
Computer port source (Computer port)
C
Network source (LAN and Screen Mirroring)
D
Whiteboard source (toggles between whiteboard mode and the
previous input source)
Selecting an Image Source
69
• Press the [Home] button on the control panel or remote control.
Then select the source you want to use from the screen displayed.
a
• Screen Mirroring is available only with the EB-1460Ui.
Image Aspect Ratio
70
The projector can display images in different width-to-height ratios called
aspect ratios. Normally, the input signal from your video source determines
the image's aspect ratio. However, for certain images you can change the
aspect ratio to fit your screen.
If you always want to use a particular aspect ratio for a certain video input
source, you can select it using the projector's Signal menu.
gg Related Links
• "Changing the Image Aspect Ratio" p.70
• "Available Image Aspect Ratios" p.70
• "Projected Image Appearance with Each Aspect Mode" p.71
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu" p.214
Changing the Image Aspect Ratio
You can change the aspect ratio of the displayed image.
a
Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
b
Press the [Aspect] button on the remote control.
c
To cycle through the available aspect ratios for your input signal, press
the [Aspect] button repeatedly.
a
To display images without black bars, set Resolution to Wide or
Normal in the projector’s Signal menu according to the computer’s
resolution.
gg Related Links
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu" p.214
Available Image Aspect Ratios
You can select the following image aspect ratios, depending on the input
signal from your image source.
a
• Black bands and cropped images may project in certain aspect ratios,
depending on the aspect ratio and resolution of your input signal.
• The Auto aspect ratio setting is available only for HDMI image
sources.
• Note that using the aspect ratio function of the projector to reduce,
enlarge, or split the projected image for commercial purposes or for
public viewing may infringe upon the rights of the copyright holder
of that image based on copyright law.
For projectors with a resolution of WUXGA (1920 × 1200)
Aspect mode Description
Auto Automatically sets the aspect ratio according to the
input signal and the Resolution setting.
Normal Displays images using the full projection area and
maintains the aspect ratio of the image.
16:9 Converts the aspect ratio of the image to 16:9.
Full Displays images using the full size of the projection
area, but does not maintain the aspect ratio.
Zoom Displays images using the full width of the projection
area and maintains the aspect ratio of the image.
Image Aspect Ratio
71
Aspect mode Description
Native Displays images as is (aspect ratio and resolution are
maintained).
Projected Image Appearance with Each Aspect Mode
Black bands and cropped images may project in certain aspect ratios,
depending on the aspect ratio and resolution of your input signal. See the
following table to confirm the position of black bands and cropped images.
a
The image for Native varies depending on the input signal.
Aspect mode Aspect ratio for input signals
16:10 16:9 4:3
Normal
Auto
16:9
Full
Zoom
Native
Color Mode
72
The projector offers different color modes to provide optimum brightness,
contrast, and color for a variety of viewing environments and image types.
You can select the mode designed to match your image and environment, or
experiment with the available modes.
gg Related Links
• "Changing the Color Mode" p.72
• "Available Color Modes" p.72
• "Setting Auto Iris" p.72
Changing the Color Mode
You can change the projector's Color Mode using the remote control to
optimize the image for your viewing environment.
a
Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
b
Press the [Color Mode] button on the remote control to change the
Color Mode.
The name of the Color Mode appears briefly on the screen and then
image appearance changes.
c
To cycle through all of the available color modes for your input signal,
press the [Color Mode] button repeatedly.
a
You can also set the Color Mode setting in the projector's Image
menu.
gg Related Links
• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.212
Available Color Modes
You can set the projector to use these color modes, depending on the input
source you are using:
Color mode Description
Presentation Best for color presentations and television images in a
bright room, with vivid images in sharp contrast.
Dynamic Best for projecting in a bright room. This is the
brightest mode.
Cinema Best for movies projected in a dark room with natural
tone images.
sRGB Best for still images projected in a bright room that
conform to the sRGB color standard.
DICOM SIM Best for projecting X-ray photographs and other
medical images.
a
The DICOM SIM color mode is for reference purposes only and should
not be used to make medical diagnoses.
Setting Auto Iris
You can turn on Auto Iris to automatically optimize the image based on the
brightness of the content.
This setting is available for Dynamic or Cinema color modes.
Color Mode
73
a
Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
b
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
c
Select the Image menu and press [Enter].
d
Select Auto Iris and press [Enter].
e
Choose one of the following options and press [Enter]:
• High Speed to adjust brightness as soon as the scene changes.
• Normal for standard brightness adjustment.
f
Press [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Adjusting the Image Color
74
You can fine-tune various aspects of how colors are displayed in your
projected images.
gg Related Links
• "Adjusting the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness" p.74
• "Adjusting the Gamma" p.75
Adjusting the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness
You can adjust the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness settings for individual
image colors.
a
Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
b
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
c
Select the Image menu and press [Enter].
d
Select Advanced and press [Enter].
e
Select RGBCMY and press [Enter].
f
Select the color to adjust, and press [Enter].
g
Do the following as necessary for each setting:
• To adjust the overall hue of the color, bluish - greenish - reddish,
adjust the Hue setting.
Adjusting the Image Color
75
• To adjust the overall vividness of the color, adjust the Saturation
setting.
• To adjust the overall color brightness of the color, adjust the
Brightness setting.
h
Press [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Adjusting the Gamma
You can correct differences in projected image colors that occur between
different image sources by adjusting the Gamma setting.
a
Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
b
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
c
Select the Image menu and press [Enter].
d
Select Advanced and press [Enter].
e
Select Gamma and press [Enter].
f
Select and adjust the correction value.
When you select a smaller value, you can reduce the overall brightness
of the image to make the image sharper. When you select a larger value,
Adjusting the Image Color
76
the dark areas of images become brighter, but the color saturation for
lighter areas may become weaker.
a
• If you selected DICOM SIM as the Color Mode setting in the
projector's Image menu, select the adjustment value according
to the projection size.
• If the projection size is 80 inches or less, select a small value.
• If the projection size is 80 inches or more, select a large
value.
• Medical images may not be reproduced correctly depending on
your settings and screen specifications.
g
Press [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons
77
The volume buttons control the projector's internal speaker system.
You can also control the volume of any external speakers you connected to
the projector.
You must adjust the volume separately for each connected input source.
a
Turn on the projector and start a presentation.
b
To lower or raise the volume, press the [Volume] buttons on the
remote control as shown.
A volume gauge appears on the screen.
c
To set the volume to a specific level for an input source, select Volume
in the projector's Settings menu.
Caution
Do not start a presentation at a high volume setting. Sudden loud noises may cause
hearing loss.
Always lower the volume before powering off, so that you can power on and then
gradually increase the volume.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu" p.216
Using the Interactive Features
Follow the instructions in these sections to use the interactive features.
gg Related Links
• "Interactive Feature Modes" p.79
• "Preparing Before Using Interactive Features" p.80
• "Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)" p.91
• "Draw on the Projected Image Using Annotation Mode" p.115
• "Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen (Computer Interactive Mode)" p.120
• "Switching the Interactive Mode" p.126
• "Selecting Network Device Display" p.127
• "Connecting to a Remote Computer" p.129
• "Using the Interactive Features over a Network" p.132
• "Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools" p.133
• "Interactive Features when Projecting Two Images Simultaneously" p.135
• "Interactive Features when Projecting with Two Projectors" p.138
Interactive Feature Modes
79
You can perform the following operations with the interactive features.
a
• Touch operations with your finger are only available for EB-
1460Ui/EB-1450Ui.
• In whiteboard mode, you can use interactive pens or your finger to write on
the projected "whiteboard".
You do not need to use a computer or install any additional software to use
the built-in whiteboard drawing feature. This is useful in meetings as a
substitute for a whiteboard.
You can share the drawing contents you create with other projectors or
tablets, save it as a PDF or PNG file, and print it or send it as an email.
• In annotation mode, you can use interactive pens or your finger to add
notes to content projected from a computer, tablet, document camera, or
other source.
This helps you emphasize projected information or include additional notes
for more effective lessons or presentations.
You can capture your annotated pages, then save or print them.
• In computer interactive mode, you can use interactive pens or your finger as
you would use a mouse. This allows you to navigate, select, and scroll
through content projected from your computer.
a
You can also use the Easy Interactive Tools software to provide
additional interactive features, such as saving and printing your
annotations. See the Easy Interactive Tools Operation Guide built into
the software for instructions.
gg Related Links
• "Draw on the Projected Image Using Annotation Mode" p.115
• "Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)" p.91
• "Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen (Computer Interactive
Mode)" p.120
Preparing Before Using Interactive Features
80
This section provides safety instructions on setting up and using the
interactive pens or performing touch operations with your finger. Read these
instructions before using the interactive features.
gg Related Links
• "Safety Instructions for Interactive Features" p.80
• "Using the Interactive Pens" p.80
• "Using Interactive Touch Operations with Your Finger" p.85
Safety Instructions for Interactive Features
The interactive feature operates by infrared communication. Note the
following important points when using this feature.
• Make sure there is no strong light or sunlight shining on the interactive pen
receiver and the projection screen.
• If there is any dust stuck to the interactive pen receiver, it could interfere
with infrared communication and you may not be able to use the features
normally. Clean the receiver if it is dirty.
• Do not put paint or any stickers on the cover of the interactive pen receiver.
• Do not use an infrared remote control or infrared microphone in the same
room because the interactive pen may malfunction.
• Do not use devices that generate powerful noise, such as rotary devices or
transformers, near the projector. You may not be able to operate the
interactive features.
gg Related Links
• "Maintaining the Projector" p.248
Using the Interactive Pens
Your projector comes with a blue pen and an orange pen, identified by the
color on the end of the pen. You can use either pen, or both at the same time
(one of each color).
Make sure the pen batteries are installed.
A
Pen tip
B
Battery indicator
C
Button
D
Strap attachment point
E
Battery cover
Hold the pen to turn it on.
When you are finished using the pen, leave the pen as it is far from the
projection screen.
Attention
• Do not use interactive pens with wet hands or in locations where the pens may
get wet. The interactive pens are not waterproof.
• Keep the projector and projection screen out of direct sunlight, or the interactive
features may not work.
Preparing Before Using Interactive Features
81
a
• Pens turns off automatically after 15 seconds when they are placed
on. Hold the pen to turn it back on.
• For best performance, hold the pen perpendicular to the board, as
shown below. Do not cover the black band near the tip of the pen.
You can do the following using the pen:
• Write or draw on the projection surface in whiteboard mode and
annotation mode.
• To select a projected item, such as an icon, tap the projection surface with
the pen tip.
• To draw on the projected screen, tap the projection surface with the pen
and drag it as necessary.
• To move the projected pointer, hover over the surface without touching
it.
• To switch the pen operation from a drawing tool to an eraser or other
functions selected in the projector's Extended menu, press the button on
the side.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > General > Advanced > Pen
Button Function
• Use the pen as a mouse in computer interactive mode.
• To left-click, tap the board with the pen tip.
• To double-click, tap twice with the pen tip.
• To right-click, press the button on the side.
• To click and drag, tap and drag with the pen.
• To move the cursor, hover over the board without touching it.
a
• If you do not want to use the hovering feature, you can turn it off
using the Hovering setting in the projector's Extended menu.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > Hovering
• To make a long press of the pen act as a right-click, select the
following settings in the projector's Extended menu.
• Set the Pen Operation Mode setting to Ubuntu Mode.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > Pen Operation
Mode
• Set the Enable Right Click setting to On.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > Enable Right Click
gg Related Links
• "Pen Calibration" p.82
Preparing Before Using Interactive Features
82
• "Calibrating Automatically" p.82
• "Calibrating Manually" p.83
• "Projector Parts - Interactive Pens" p.20
Pen Calibration
Calibration coordinates the positioning of the pen with the location of your
cursor. You only need to calibrate the first time you use your projector.
You can use Auto Calibration to calibrate the system, but Manual
Calibration is also available for finer adjustments or if Auto Calibration
failed.
a
• Move any pen you are not using away from the projection screen
while calibrating the system.
• Calibrate the system again if you notice any discrepancy in
positioning after doing any of the following:
• Performing Geometry Correction
• Adjusting the image size
• Using the Image Shift feature
• Changing the projector position
• The calibration results remain until you recalibrate.
Calibrating Automatically
You need to calibrate the first time you use your projector, and you do not
need the pens or a computer for Auto Calibration.
a
You can also start Auto Calibration by pressing the [User] button on
the remote control.
a
Press the [Menu] button, select the Extended menu, and press the
[Enter] button.
b
Select the Easy Interactive Function setting and press the [Enter]
button.
Preparing Before Using Interactive Features
83
c
Select Auto Calibration and press the [Enter] button.
The following screen appears.
d
Adjust the focus, if necessary, by opening the air filter cover on the side
of the projector and sliding the focus lever.
e
Select Yes and press the [Enter] button.
A pattern appears then disappears, and the system is calibrated. If you
see a message that calibration failed, you need to calibrate manually.
The cursor location and pen position should match after calibration. If not,
you may need to calibrate manually.
Calibrating Manually
If the cursor location and pen position do not match after auto calibration,
you can calibrate manually.
Make sure to perform the manual calibration when you project images on a
curved surface.
a
Press the [Menu] button, select the Extended menu, and press the
[Enter] button.
b
Select the Easy Interactive Function setting and press the [Enter]
button.
Preparing Before Using Interactive Features
84
c
Select Manual Calibration and press the [Enter] button.
The following screen appears.
d
Adjust the focus, if necessary, by opening the air filter cover on the side
of the projector and sliding the focus lever.
e
Select Yes and press the [Enter] button.
A flashing green circle appears in the upper left corner of your
projected image.
f
Touch the center of the circle with the tip of the pen.
The circle disappears, and you see another circle below the first one.
a
For the most accurate calibration, make sure you touch the
center of the circle.
Preparing Before Using Interactive Features
85
g
Touch the center of the next circle, then repeat. When you get to the
bottom of the column, the next circle appears at the top of a new
column.
a
• Make sure you are not blocking the signal between the pen and
the interactive receiver.
• If you make a mistake, press the [Esc] button on the remote
control or control panel to go back to the previous circle.
• To cancel the calibration process, press and hold the [Esc]
button for 2 seconds.
h
Continue until all of the circles disappear.
Using Interactive Touch Operations with Your Finger
You can use your finger to interact with the projected screen, just as you
would use an interactive pen (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui). You can use either a
pen or your finger, or use both at the same time.
The projector recognizes up to six touch points in computer interactive mode.
When performing touch operations with your finger, you can use two fingers
in annotation and whiteboard modes.
Do the following before using your finger for touch operations:
• Install the Touch Unit
• Calibrate the system manually for the pen
• Perform angle adjustment for the Touch Unit
• Calibrate the system for touch operations
See the Installation Guide for details.
The Touch Unit turns on and is ready for touch operation with your finger
when you turn on the projector and the indicator lights up in blue.
Preparing Before Using Interactive Features
86
a
• Check the following if the Touch Unit does not turn on.
• The Power setting in the Touch Unit Setup menu is set to On.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > Touch Unit Setup >
Power
• The Touch Unit is connected to the projector's TCH port with a
Touch Unit connection cable.
• Positioning discrepancies may occur depending on the angle of your
finger or the direction you point.
• Touch operations with your finger may not work properly with long
or artificial nails, or with your fingers wrapped in bandages.
• Touch operations may not be recognized correctly if your fingers or
the pens are too close together or crossed.
• If clothing or another part of your body comes close to or touches
the screen, the touch operations may work incorrectly.
• If you touch the screen with your free hand during touch operations,
the touch operations may work incorrectly.
You can perform the following touch operations with your finger:
• Use your finger as a mouse in computer interactive mode.
• To left-click, tap the board with your finger.
• To double-click, tap twice with your finger.
• To click and drag, press on and drag an item with your finger.
a
• If your device supports these functions, you can also do the
following:
• To zoom in or out, touch an item using two fingers, and either
move your fingers away from each other (stretch to zoom in) or
toward each other (pinch to zoom out).
• To rotate the image, touch the image using two fingers and then
rotate your hand.
• To scroll up or down the page, or move backward or forward in a
browser window, use gestures such as flicks.
• You can only use one tool with one finger at a time.
• Write or draw on the projection surface in annotation mode and
whiteboard mode.
• To select a projected item, such as an icon, tap the projection surface with
your finger.
• To draw on the projected screen for the first time after turning on the
projector, select a pen in the toolbar and tap the projection surface with
your finger. If you do not do this, your finger works as an eraser the first
time you use touch operations.
• To zoom in or out, touch an item using two fingers, and either move
your fingers away from each other (stretch to zoom in) or toward each
other (pinch to zoom out).
• To rotate the image in whiteboard mode, touch the image using two
fingers and then rotate your hand.
gg Related Links
• "Calibrating for Touch Operations with Your Finger" p.87
Preparing Before Using Interactive Features
87
• "Safety Instructions for Interactive Touch Operations" p.89
• "Laser Warning Labels - Touch Unit" p.90
Calibrating for Touch Operations with Your Finger
Calibration coordinates the positioning of your finger with the location of
your cursor (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui). If the cursor location and your finger
position do not match, you need to calibrate again.
a
• The positioning of your finger is usually adjusted when the Touch
Unit is installed. See the Installation Guide for details.
• Make sure you have calibrated the system for the pen using Auto
Calibration or Manual Calibration before calibrating for touch
operations with your finger.
• Calibrate for touch operations with your finger again if you notice
any discrepancy in positioning after doing any of the following:
• Calibrating the system for use with the pen (automatically or
manually)
• Performing angle adjustments for the Touch Unit
• Performing Geometry Correction
• Adjusting the image size
• Using the Image Shift feature
• Changing the projector position
a
Press the [Menu] button, select the Extended menu, and then press
[Enter].
b
Select the Easy Interactive Function setting and press [Enter].
Preparing Before Using Interactive Features
88
c
Select Touch Unit Setup and press the [Enter] button.
d
Select Touch Calibration and press the [Enter] button.
The following screen appears.
e
Adjust the focus, if necessary, by opening the air filter cover on the side
of the projector and sliding the focus lever.
f
Select Yes and press the [Enter] button.
A flashing green circle appears in the upper left corner of your
projected image.
g
Touch and hold the center of the circle with your finger until the circle
disappears and the another circle appears, then release it.
Preparing Before Using Interactive Features
89
a
• For the most accurate calibration, make sure you touch the
center of the circle.
• Do not touch the circle with anything except the tip of your
finger.
h
Touch the center of the next circle with your finger, then repeat. When
you get to the bottom of the column, the next circle appears at the top
of a new column.
a
• Make sure you are not blocking the signal between your finger
and the interactive receiver.
• If you touch the wrong position, press the [Esc] button on the
remote control or control panel.
• To cancel touch calibration, hold down the [Esc] button for
two seconds.
i
Continue until all of the circles disappear.
Safety Instructions for Interactive Touch Operations
Touch operation with your finger is enabled by installing the Touch Unit with
a built-in high-power laser (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui).
The laser radiates from the laser diffusion ports on rear of the Touch Unit:
Note the following important points when performing touch operations.
Preparing Before Using Interactive Features
90
Warning
• Never open any cases on the projector or the Touch Unit. Never attempt to
disassemble or modify the projector or the Touch Unit. Electrical voltages inside
the projector can cause severe injury.
• Unplug the projector from the outlet and refer all repairs to qualified service
personnel if any problems occur with the projector or the Touch Unit.
Continued use of the Touch Unit may result in fire or accidents, and can also
damage your eyes.
Laser Warning Labels - Touch Unit
The Touch Unit is a Class 1 laser product that complies with IEC/EN60825-
1:2007.
The labels indicating the Class 1 laser product and warnings are placed in the
following places on the Touch Unit:
The labels indicate the following:
• CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
• WARNING: Never open any covers on this unit. Laser product inside.
• WARNING:
• CAUTION: CLASS 3B INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
• AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
91
You can use your projector to project a whiteboard image onto a plain
surface. You can then use the interactive pens or your finger (EB-1460Ui/EB-
1450Ui) to draw letters and shapes on the image as if it were a whiteboard.
This is useful in locations that do not have a whiteboard.
a
In whiteboard mode, you can also use both pens, or both pens and
your finger, at the same time.
gg Related Links
• "Starting Whiteboard Mode" p.91
• "Whiteboard Mode Toolbar" p.92
• "Whiteboard Mode Bottom Toolbar" p.95
• "Projecting Scanned Images in Whiteboard Mode" p.97
• "Compatible File Types for Opening in Whiteboard Mode" p.98
• "Sharing Drawings Created in Whiteboard Mode" p.99
• "Whiteboard Sharing with Other Devices" p.105
Starting Whiteboard Mode
You can draw on the whiteboard screen using the whiteboard mode toolbar
and bottom toolbar.
a
Press the [Whiteboard] button on the control pad or the remote
control.
You see the whiteboard screen and toolbar, for example:
A
Whiteboard mode drawing toolbar
B
Whiteboard mode bottom toolbar
When the toolbars are displayed, you can write on the projected screen
using the interactive pen or your finger (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui).
The drawing toolbar provides drawing tools such as a pen and shapes.
The bottom toolbar provides additional tools, such as tools for
controlling the projector or saving the projected screen.
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
92
a
• You can move the toolbar by tapping and dragging the bar at
the top or bottom of the toolbar.
• You can move the bottom toolbar right and left by tapping and
dragging the right or left end of the bar.
• You can also start whiteboard mode using one of the following
methods.
• In annotation mode, tap and drag the or whiteboard
mode tab to the edge of the screen.
• Select the icon on the bottom toolbar and then select
Whiteboard.
• Select Whiteboard as the Web Remote source setting.
• Select Whiteboard on the Home screen.
• Any drawings that you create in whiteboard mode are retained
if you change to annotation mode or other image sources.
• If you press the [Whiteboard] button on the control pad or
remote control while using whiteboard mode, the image source
switches to the source you last used before starting whiteboard
mode.
gg Related Links
• "Safety Instructions for Whiteboard Mode" p.92
Safety Instructions for Whiteboard Mode
Note the following important points when using this feature.
• All drawing data is cleared when the projector is turned off. Set the Auto
Delete Saved Data setting to Retain in the projector's Extended menu to
restore the drawing when the projector is turned on again.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings > Policy > Auto Delete Saved Data
• On the projector's Whiteboard Settings menu, you can make settings to
prevent data leakage. Make settings if necessary.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings
• When the projector is shared, lent, given to a third party, or disposed of,
check that there is no important data such as personal or confidential
information saved in the internal storage, and if there is, make sure you
delete the information.
• Users are responsible for managing this data. Epson takes no responsibility
for direct or indirect damage caused by loss, damage, or disclosure of the
user's data or data for third parties through the use of this projector. Make
sure you understand these points before use.
Whiteboard Mode Toolbar
The whiteboard mode toolbar lets you draw and write on the projected
screen. The whiteboard mode toolbar is shown in the following illustration.
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
93
Shows or hides the toolbar. You can move the tabs up and down.
Splits the screen and displays the annotation mode screen. You can
move the tabs up and down.
• To enlarge one image while reducing the other image during split
screen projection, tap and drag the tab.
• To switch to annotation mode, tap and drag the tab to the edge of
the screen.
Undoes the last operation. You can undo up to 15 operations per page.
Redoes the last undo.
Selects all objects and images in a rectangular area. Specify the area by
dragging on the projection surface. You can also tap an object or
image to select it.
• Tap an area in which there are no objects or images to cancel the
current selection.
• Select the icon at the bottom right of the selected object or
image to perform the following operations:
• Cut
• Copy
• Paste
• Change Color: Changes the color of the selected objects. You
cannot change the color of the images.
• Group/Ungroup (available when selecting multiple objects and
images)
• Auto Crop: Deletes the black frame around the image (available
when selecting a single image)
• Delete
To paste the cut or copied object or image, tap the screen, select the
icon, and select Paste.
• Drag the edge of the area to enlarge or reduce the object or image.
• Drag the side of the area to crop the selected image (available when
selecting a single image).
• Drag at the top of the area to rotate the selected object or image.
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
94
Selects all objects and images in a freehand area. Specify the area by
drawing on the projection surface. You can also tap an object or image
to select it.
• Tap an area in which there are no objects or images to cancel the
current selection.
• Select the icon at the bottom right of the selected object or
image to perform the following operations:
• Cut
• Copy
• Paste
• Change Color: Changes the color of the selected objects. You
cannot change the color of the images.
• Group/Ungroup (available when selecting multiple objects and
images)
• Auto Crop: Deletes the black frame around the image (available
when selecting a single image)
• Delete
To paste the cut or copied object or image, tap the screen, select the
icon, and select Paste.
• Drag the edge of the area to enlarge or reduce the object or image.
• Drag the side of the area to crop the selected image (available when
selecting a single image).
• Drag at the top of the area to rotate the selected object or image.
Inserts a circle, square, triangle, or other shape.
You can select the line width and color.
Captures the selected area as an image and pastes the captured image.
Tap and drag on the projection surface to select the area, and then lift
the pen to paste the image.
Turns the pen into a draggable pointer and displays it on the
whiteboard screen and all connected devices.
You cannot operate the pointer at the same time on multiple devices.
a
The pointer feature differs from the projector's
pointer feature. You cannot change the form of
the pointer or control it with the remote control.
Inserts an image from the USB storage device or a network folder.
You can select files that meet the following specifications:
• Format: PNG, JPEG
• Resolution: 2048 × 2048 maximum
Images larger than a page are reduced to fit.
Writes or draws free-form lines with custom pen.
Select the icon to change custom pen color and width.
Writes or draws free-form lines with a transparent highlighter pen.
Select the icon to change highlighter pen color and width.
Black pen (fine point on left, thick on right).
Red pen (fine point on left, thick on right).
Blue pen (fine point on left, thick on right).
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
95
Eraser (thin width on left, thick on right).
a
• If you tap a shape when selecting the eraser,
the whole shape is deleted. You cannot delete a
partial shape.
• You cannot clear images and templates.
Clears all the current drawing content.
Hides the toolbar after each drawing.
: The toolbar is hidden while drawing.
: The toolbar is always displayed.
Closes the toolbar.
Displays which tool you are using with your pen or finger
(EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui).
: Using pen tools. The color of the icon indicates the color of the
pen.
: Using tools to select objects and images.
: Using a tool to capture the selected area.
: Using a pointer tool.
: Using a shape tool.
: Using eraser tools.
: Enlarging the projected screen.
: Enlarging the selected area.
a
• You can display the following number and size of images on the
whiteboard screen (including images stored on the clipboard).
• Up to 20 files per page and 1920 × 1200 × 2 pixels
• Up to 1920 × 1200 × 50 pixels for all pages
• To paste an image, you need to use the same pen that you used to cut
or copy the image.
• Drawn objects are displayed at the front of the projected image.
However, you can change the order by using the grouped feature.
• If objects or images are moved out of the projected screen, you may
not be able to select them.
Whiteboard Mode Bottom Toolbar
The whiteboard mode bottom toolbar lets you edit the projected image and
use whiteboard mode features. The whiteboard mode bottom toolbar is
shown in the following illustration.
Displays the Home screen.
Shares drawing contents across multiple devices and projects the
shared drawing contents from other projectors.
Performs one of the following:
• Save: Saves the current drawing content and returns whiteboard
mode to its default status.
• New meeting: Clears all the current drawing content and images,
and returns whiteboard mode to its default status.
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
96
Opens a file and reads the data into a new page.
Captures images from a scanner and pastes them on a new page.
Selects a background template.
Select Setting to add or delete user templates. You can also set user
templates using a Web browser.
a
• Each time you select the ruler icon
or the grid icon , the
line width or grid size changes.
• If the Protect User Templates setting is set
to On in the projector's Whiteboard
Settings menu, you cannot change user
templates in whiteboard mode.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings >
Policy > Protect User Templates
Moves to the previous page. Tap and hold the icon to display the
first page.
Displays a list of the page thumbnails you are editing.
The blue frame indicates the current page and the green frame
indicates the displayed area.
You can perform the following operations using the interactive
pen.
• Switch the page you want to display by selecting the thumbnail.
• Scroll the display by flicking the thumbnail.
• Move the displayed area by dragging the green frame.
• Tap the current page to perform the following operations:
• : Moves the current page to the left.
• : Deletes the current page.
• : Duplicates the current page, and adds it after the current
page.
• : Moves the current page to the right.
Moves to the next page. Tap and hold the icon to display the last
page.
Adds and opens a new page.
Prints the projected screen.
Saves the projected screen to a file.
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
97
Sends the projected screen by email. You need to select mail server
settings before using this feature.
Shares the current screen using Epson iProjection software.
Changes the image source using the displayed list.
To close the image source list, select the icon at the top of the
list.
Enlarges or reduces the whiteboard screen.
• : Reduces the image.
• : Enlarges the image.
• : Returns to the original size.
• : Enlarges the selected area.
• : Displays the whole whiteboard screen during split screen
projection.
• : Displays the full whiteboard screen vertically during split
screen projection.
Turns the video and audio off. Tap the screen to turn the video and
audio back on.
Splits the screen to project two images at once. Press again to
return to projecting one image at a time.
Displays the help screen for the toolbar and the bottom toolbar
functions.
Select Return to close the help screen.
Closes the bottom toolbar.
a
• You can select detailed settings for whiteboard mode on the
projector's Whiteboard Settings menu.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings
• You cannot use the following functions in whiteboard mode.
• E-Zoom
• Page up or down using the remote control
Projecting Scanned Images in Whiteboard Mode
You can scan a paper document into a new page in whiteboard mode. Make
sure a supported printer with scanning capabilities is connected to the control
pad or to your network.
You need to make settings for network printers in advance.
a
• Printers with ESC/P-R commands are supported.
• Certain products, such as standalone scanners, cannot use this
feature. For a list of supported products, contact Epson for help.
• You cannot scan documents when the printer is in an unprintable
status such as when ink has run out.
When scanning using your product, you cannot use the following scanning
functions even if they are available:
• Using the scan button on your product.
• Scanning parts of the document.
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
98
• Scanning double-sided originals using an Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF).
a
Load your original in the product.
b
Select the icon on the bottom toolbar.
The Scan screen is displayed.
c
Select the following scan settings on the Scan screen. (Select Advanced
to open the detailed menu.)
A
Select Color or Monochrome.
B
Select the orientation of the scanned document.
C
Select the scanner you want to use.
D
Set the scan quality.
E
Set the paper size.
F
Select where you loaded your original. If your product does not include
an ADF, the ADF selection is ignored.
d
Select Scan.
The Scan screen is displayed.
After scanning, the image is projected as a new page in whiteboard mode.
a
When using a product with a built-in ADF, you can read up to 10
sheets. Repeat the procedure if you need to scan documents of more
than 10 sheets.
Compatible File Types for Opening in Whiteboard
Mode
The following file types can be opened and read into a page in whiteboard
mode. Images larger than a page are reduced to fit.
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
99
Type File Type (Extension) Notes
Image .jpg The following cannot be read.
• Images with a resolution greater than
2048 × 2048
• Files with the extension ".jpeg"
• CMYK color mode formats
• Progressive formats
.png Cannot read images with a resolution
greater than 2048 × 2048.
PDF .pdf You can open PDF files for version 1.7 or
earlier.
Specify the page number to open a PDF
file. If the file is password protected, enter
the password.
EWF .ewf Specify the page number to open an EWF
(Epson Whiteboard Format) file.
If the file is password protected, enter the
password.
Sharing Drawings Created in Whiteboard Mode
You can share the contents of drawings you create in whiteboard mode by
saving or printing them, or sending an email containing the content.
gg Related Links
• "Saving Drawing Contents in Whiteboard Mode" p.99
• "Available File Format in Whiteboard Mode" p.101
• "Printing Drawing Contents in Whiteboard Mode" p.101
• "Available Printer Control Commands in Whiteboard Mode" p.102
• "Sending Emails in Whiteboard Mode" p.102
• "Creating an Address Book" p.104
• "Available Directory Service in Whiteboard Mode" p.104
Saving Drawing Contents in Whiteboard Mode
You can save the content you created on the projected screen to a file.
Caution
If you are using a multi-card reader or USB hub, operations may not be performed
correctly. For best results, connect directly to the projector or the control pad.
a
You may not be able to use USB storage devices that incorporate
security functions.
a
Select the icon on the bottom toolbar.
The Save screen is displayed.
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
100
b
Select the following save settings on the Save screen.
A
Select the destination where you want to save the file.
Select USB Storage or Network Folder to save to a connected USB
storage device or network folder.
Select PC via USB Cable to temporarily save the file on the projector and
make it available for copying from the computer. After the file is copied,
it is erased.
If sharing the whiteboard, select Browser Participants to temporarily
save the file on the projector and make it available for download through
a Web browser. After the file is downloaded, it is erased.
B
For USB Storage or Network Folder, select the target folder using the
displayed Open dialog box.
C
Enter a file name using the displayed keyboard.
D
Select the save format (PDF, PNG, or EWF). For Browser Participants,
EWF is not available.
E
For PDFs or EWFs, select the check box and enter a password to encrypt
the file.
Attention
• When you enter a password, it is displayed on the screen.
• When encrypting a file, make sure you do not forget the
password.
F
Set the range of pages that you want to save. Current is selected when the
save format is PNG.
c
Select Save (Next for PC via USB Cable or Distribute for Browser
Participants).
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
101
a
• When PC via USB Cable is selected in step 2, the drawing content is
temporarily saved on the projector and the instruction dialog box is
displayed. Follow the on-screen instructions to save the data on your
computer.
• When Browser Participants is selected in step 2, the drawing
content is temporarily saved on the projector and following dialog
boxes are displayed in Web browsers and the projector.
• Web browsers: A dialog box is displayed to save the drawing
content. You can save the file as a PDF or in PNG format.
• Projector: A dialog box is displayed where you can check the
download status. Make sure all participants finish downloading,
and then close the dialog box.
Available File Format in Whiteboard Mode
You can save in the following file formats:
• PNG (Resolution: 1920 × 1200)
• PDF (set a password if necessary)
• EWF (only available for projectors that support the EWF format; set a
password if necessary)
When saving the file as editable, select the EWF format. The EWF format file
can only be used with the projector.
a
To import the EWF files saved on this projector into other projectors,
you may need to update the projectors' firmware on which you want to
import the EWF files.
Printing Drawing Contents in Whiteboard Mode
You can print your pages directly from the projector to a supported printer
(USB or networked).
You need to make settings for network printers in advance.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings > Print
s Network > Network Configuration
a
Select the icon on the bottom toolbar.
The Print screen is displayed.
b
Select the following print settings on the Print screen. (Select Advanced
to open the detailed menu.)
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
102
A
Specifies the number of copies. You can specify up to 20 sheets.
B
Specifies the print color.
C
Displays a list of connected printer names. Select the printer you want to
use.
D
Set the print paper size.
E
Set the print quality.
F
Set the number of pages per sheet.
G
If your printer supports double-sided printing, select whether to print on
both sides.
H
Set whether to collate pages when printing.
I
Set whether to print a date and time on each page.
J
Set whether to print a page number on each page.
K
Set whether to add a border to each page.
L
Set the range of pages that you want to print.
c
Select Print.
Available Printer Control Commands in Whiteboard Mode
The following printer* control commands are supported.
Control commands Connection method
ESC/P-R USB or over a network
ESC/Page, ESC/Page-Color Over a network
PCL6
* Not all printers are supported. For more details on supported models,
contact Epson for help.
Sending Emails in Whiteboard Mode
You can attach an image of the screen projected in whiteboard mode and
send it by email.
You can specify up to 50 addresses.
a
• To send emails, you need to make mail server settings in advance.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings > Mail
• The address set for the sender in the projector's Whiteboard Settings
menu is used as the sender's address. If the sender's address has not
been set, the address set for the recipient as displayed as the sender.
• You cannot edit the text in the email.
a
Select the icon on the bottom toolbar.
The Mail screen is displayed.
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
103
b
Select the following email settings on the Mail screen.
A
Enter the email address for the recipient using the displayed keyboard.
The email address you set is stored until you create a new meeting or
turn off the projector.
a
When you set Disallow Address Input to On in
the projector's Whiteboard Settings menu, you
cannot enter the email address directly. Set
Disallow Address Input to Off first.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings > Mail >
Disallow Address Input
B
Enter the subject for the email.
C
Select the format for the attached file (PDF, PNG, or EWF).
D
For PDFs or EWFs, select the check box and enter a password to encrypt
the file.
Attention
• When you enter a password, it is displayed on the screen.
• When encrypting a file, make sure you do not forget the
password.
E
Set the range of pages that you want to send.
F
Enter the file name for the attachment.
G
Specify the email address for the recipient using the displayed E-mail
Address dialog box. You can specify up to 50 addresses.
You can set the address book using the Web Control screen or the
directory service in the projector's Whiteboard Settings menu.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings > Directory
c
Select Send.
a
• If there is a lot of content on the projected screen, it may take a
while to send the email.
• You may not be able to send the email depending on the
destination mail server settings. Contact your network
administrator about the mail server settings in advance.
Joe Smith xxxxxx@xxxxx.com
M
ary Jones-Smith xxxxxxx@xxxx.com
John Q. Public xxxx@xxxxxx.com
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
104
Creating an Address Book
When sending e-mails from whiteboard mode, you can choose e-mail
addresses from an address book. You can create the address book by loading a
text file of up to 999 addresses through the Web Control screen.
a
Addresses are displayed in the order they appear in the text file.
a
Create the text file containing the list of addresses you want to add to
the address book. The file must have the following characteristics:
• Tab-delimited
• Each line must contain a pair of strings separated by a tab: <name>
<tab> <email_address>
• Each line can contain up to 256 characters.
• Filename with a .txt extension
• Character code must be Unicode
An example of a text file:
b
Make sure the projector is turned on.
c
Start your Web browser on a computer connected to the network.
d
Type the projector's IP address into the browser's address box and press
the computer's Enter key.
e
Select the icon to access the Web Control screen.
a
• You may need to log in before you see the Web Control screen.
If you see a log in window, enter your user name and
password. (The user name is EPSONWEB and the default
password is admin.)
• You can change the password in Web Control Password in
the projector's Network menu.
s Network > Network Configuration > Basic > Web
Control Password
• You need to select the Config icon to access the Web Control
screen using your mobile device.
f
Select Whiteboard Settings > Mail > Address Book Settings >
Address Book File and select the Choose File button.
g
Select the address book file and select Set.
The address book file is uploaded to the projector.
h
To delete the address book, select Whiteboard Settings > Mail >
Address Book Settings > Delete Address Book and select Send.
Available Directory Service in Whiteboard Mode
The following directory service servers are supported.
Server type Directory service server
Operating system Windows Server 2008 R2 Service Pack 1
Windows Server 2012
Windows Server 2016
Port Variable (default is 389)
Authentication Anonymous (no authentication)
Simple
Digest-MD5
Encryption SASL layer encryption
(SSL/TLS is not supported)
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
105
Notes for search
• Up to 200 matched addresses are listed.
• You can search addresses using alphanumeric characters.
Whiteboard Sharing with Other Devices
You can share the whiteboard screen with other devices that are connected to
the same network. This allows you to view and draw on the whiteboard screen
at the same time from other projectors or tablet devices.
a
You can share the whiteboard screen with projectors that support the
whiteboard sharing feature. You may need to update the projectors'
firmware.
When sharing a whiteboard, you need to connect the projector to the
network.
To connect to the network using a cable, connect a LAN cable to the
projector.
To connect to the network wirelessly, install the supplied wireless LAN unit
on the projector, and then configure the Wireless LAN settings from the
Network menu.
s Network > Network Configuration > Wireless LAN
Make sure that the Secure HTTP setting is set to On in the projector's
Network menu to share the whiteboard.
gg Related Links
• "Sharing Whiteboard Screen with Other Devices" p.105
• "Connection to the Shared Whiteboard" p.108
• "Connecting to a Shared Whiteboard from a Projector" p.108
• "Available Features when Connecting to a Whiteboard Screen" p.109
• "Connecting to a Shared Whiteboard from a Computer or Other Device via
a Web Browser" p.111
• "Supported Web Browsers for Sharing a Whiteboard" p.112
• "Toolbar for Whiteboard Screen Connecting via a Web Browser" p.112
Sharing Whiteboard Screen with Other Devices
You can share your whiteboard with up to 15 other devices on the same
network, including other projectors that support whiteboard sharing,
computers, mobile devices, and other devices. The content is shared to other
devices where it can be viewed and saved. You can also draw on the
projector's whiteboard screen from the other devices.
When sharing your whiteboard screen, you need to open the following
network ports.
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
106
Port Protocol Usage Communication
80 HTTP Connect/Transfer
images
two-way
443 HTTPS two-way
a
The communication bandwidth for sharing the whiteboard screen
differs depending on the amount of drawing content. Also, depending
on the total amount of drawing content, a broad bandwidth is
temporarily required when the connections starts.
a
Select the icon on the bottom toolbar.
a
You can also select Whiteboard Sharing on the Home screen.
The Whiteboard Sharing screen is displayed.
b
Select Start sharing with this whiteboard.
A PIN code is displayed for connecting to the projector.
c
Check the PIN code. If necessary, change it. You can set up to seven
digits for the PIN code.
a
Once you set the PIN code, you cannot change it until you end
whiteboard sharing.
d
Select one of the following as the Sharing Mode setting to permit
access to features by devices connecting to the whiteboard:
• Presentation: Connected devices can view and save the whiteboard
screen.
• Discussion: Connected devices can draw on the shared screen.
• Collaboration: Connected devices can access all available features
except creating a new meeting.
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
107
e
Select Start.
Whiteboard screen sharing with other devices is now available.
The bar indicating the shared status is displayed at the top middle of
the screen. You can move the status bar right and left by tapping and
dragging the right or left end of the bar.
f
Check the connection information for the shared whiteboard and
connect to the projector from other devices.
A
Displays a QR code to connect to the shared whiteboard from your
mobile device using the Epson iProjection (iOS/Android) app.
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
108
B
Displays the information to connect to the shared whiteboard from other
projectors.
• Projector Name/Address: Displays the projector's address for
connecting.
• PIN Code: Displays the PIN code you set in step 3.
Caution
• If the PIN code is not entered correctly in the external devices,
you cannot connect to the projector.
• To avoid the risk of data being disclosed, restrict the PIN code
to the users connecting to the projector.
C
Sets editing permissions for connected users if necessary.
D
Sends email invitations using the displayed dialog box.
g
Select Close.
The projector's whiteboard screen is displayed on the connected device.
a
• To finish sharing the whiteboard screen, select the icon on the
bottom toolbar, and then select Stop Sharing on the displayed
screen. You can also close the shared whiteboard by selecting the
icon on the status bar.
• When a message is displayed, select OK to finish and discard the
content on the shared whiteboard screen.
• To save the shared whiteboard screen on other devices before you
finish sharing the whiteboard, select Distribute to Participants
and Distribute. Make sure the screen is saved, and then select
Done.
• If there is a lot of drawing content and images pasted on the
whiteboard screen, it may take a while to be reflected on other
projectors and Web browsers.
Connection to the Shared Whiteboard
You can connect to a projector that is sharing its whiteboard on the same
network. You can view, save, and draw on the shared whiteboard from your
connected projector, computer, or device.
Caution
All drawing content on the projected screen is erased if you connect to another
whiteboard screen.
a
• When connecting to a shared whiteboard, you need to know the
connection information. Select the icon on the bottom toolbar
or tap the status bar on the projector that is sharing its whiteboard
and check the information on the displayed Shared Whiteboard
screen.
• Available features depend on the Sharing Mode setting of the
projector you are connecting to.
If the Sharing Mode setting is changed while connecting to the
shared whiteboard, the available features for the connected devices
are also changed.
• You can connect up to 15 devices to one projector.
Connecting to a Shared Whiteboard from a Projector
You can connect another projector on the same network to a projector that is
sharing its whiteboard.
a
Communication between projectors is encrypted using SSL.
a
Press the [Whiteboard] button on the control pad or the remote
control.
The projector displays the whiteboard.
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
109
b
Select the icon on the bottom toolbar.
The Shared Whiteboard screen is displayed.
c
Select Connect to the shared whiteboard.
d
Check the displayed message, and then select OK.
e
Enter the IP address and PIN code.
A
Enter the IP address for the projector you want to connect to.
Select the icon to display the addresses for the last 10 projector
connections.
Connection logs are saved even if the projector is turned off.
B
Enter the PIN code for the projector you want to connect to.
a
If you enter the wrong PIN code 10 times in 10
minutes, you cannot connect to the whiteboard for
three minutes.
f
Select Connect.
Both projectors display the shared whiteboard screen.
The bar indicating the shared status is displayed at the top middle of
the screen. You can move the status bar right and left by tapping and
dragging the right or left end of the bar.
g
Select Close.
a
• To disconnect from the shared whiteboard, select the
icon on the bottom toolbar, and then select Stop Sharing on
the displayed screen. You can also disconnect from the shared
whiteboard by selecting the icon on the status bar. When
a message is displayed, select OK.
• If there is a lot of drawing content and images pasted on the
whiteboard screen, it may take a while to be reflected on other
projectors and Web browsers.
Available Features when Connecting to a Whiteboard Screen
Available features depend on the Sharing Mode setting of the projector you
are connecting to.
Available features for all authorities
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
110
• : Whiteboard Sharing (for disconnection)
• : Print
• : Save
• : Send E-mails
• : Screen Sharing
• : Source Select
• : Zoom
• : A/V Mute
• : Split Screen
• : Help
Available features for Discussion and Collaboration
• : Pointer
• : Undo
• : Redo
• : Rectangle Select
• : Free Select
• : Shapes
• : Read Image
• : Pen
• : Highlighter Pen
• : Black Pen
• : Red Pen
• : Blue Pen
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
111
• : Eraser
• : Clear Screen
Available features for Collaboration
• : Capture Image
• : Page Movement (previous)
• : Page Thumbnails
• : Page Movement (next)
• : Paste File
• : Read from Scanner
• : Template
• : New Page
Connecting to a Shared Whiteboard from a Computer or Other
Device via a Web Browser
You can connect to a shared whiteboard from a computer or device on the
same network using a Web browser.
a
Connect your device to the same network as the projector you want to
connect to.
a
The connection method differs depending on the device. See the
documentation supplied with the device. Check the Wi-Fi
settings when using a tablet device.
b
Start a Web browser on the device.
c
Enter the whiteboard IP address into a web browser in this format: for
example, "192.168.1.100".
a
If available, you can also click the link in the invitation email sent
from the projector that is sharing its whiteboard.
d
Select the icon.
You see a prompt to enter a PIN code.
e
Enter the PIN code for the projector you want to connect to, and then
select Connect.
You see the shared whiteboard content and toolbar on your computer
or device.
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
112
a
• To disconnect from the shared whiteboard, select the icon on
the bottom toolbar and then select Disconnect. You can also
disconnect from the shared whiteboard by closing the Web browser.
• If there is a lot of drawing content and images pasted on the
whiteboard screen, it may take a while to be reflected on other
projectors and Web browsers.
• Shared whiteboard content is encrypted. Some Web browsers use
SSL encryption. You can continue to connect to the Web browser
even if a certificate error is displayed.
Supported Web Browsers for Sharing a Whiteboard
You can connect to a shared whiteboard using the web browsers described
here.
Operating system Web browser
Windows 7 or later Internet Explorer 10/11
Microsoft Edge
OS X 10.7 or later Safari 6/7/8
iOS 7.0 or later Standard browser
Android OS 4.0 or later Google Chrome
Chrome OS (Chromebook) Google Chrome
a
The available drawing range narrows depending on the screen size of
the device.
Toolbar for Whiteboard Screen Connecting via a Web Browser
When connected through a web browser, the whiteboard toolbars allow you
to interact with the shared whiteboard. Available features depend on the
Sharing Mode setting of the projector you are connecting to.
Available features for all authorities
Opens another window and displays the projected image of
the projector you are connecting to.
a
Shared projected image content is
encrypted using SSL. You can continue to
connect to the Web browser even if a
certificate error is displayed.
Disconnects.
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
113
Adjusts the view of the display in the web browser window.
The following operations are available:
• Fit page
• Fit width
• Fit height
• Zoom In
• Zoom Out
Displays the entire whiteboard.
Saves the whiteboard screen as a PDF or PNG file depending
on the settings of the projector you are connecting to;
available only when Browser Participants or Distribute to
the participants. is selected on the projector.
Available features for Discussion and Collaboration
Selects a pen for drawing.
Selects a translucent highlighter pen for drawing.
Selects a shape to place on the screen.
Selects the eraser tool so you can tap on content and select
OK to delete it; you cannot delete partially drawn content.
Selects an object or image. When dragging, a frame that
indicates the selection range is displayed. You can select
objects and images within the frame.
You can perform the following operations while an object or
an image is selected:
• When dragging, you can move the objects and images
within the frame.
• When selecting the icon again, you can perform the
following operations:
• Cut
• Copy
• Paste
• Group
• Ungrouped
• Delete
• When dragging an edge of the frame, you can enlarge or
reduce the objects and images within the frame.
• When dragging at the top of the frame, you can rotate
the objects and images within the frame.
Displays the draggable pointer on the whiteboard screen and
all connected devices.
Selects the line thickness for the current pen or shape.
Selects the color of the selected pen or shape.
Select the icon to select other colors.
Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)
114
Loads an image on the whiteboard.
You can select files that meet the following specifications:
• Format: PNG, JPEG
• Resolution: 2048 × 2048 maximum
Images larger than a page are reduced to fit.
Available features for Collaboration
Selects a background template.
Controls which whiteboard page is displayed on the shared
whiteboard
• : Synchronizes the page with the connected
whiteboard. When you edit the page, the change is
reflected on the shared whiteboard.
• : Displays a page that differs from the connected
whiteboard. You can only modify pages that are displayed
on the shared whiteboard.
Displays the page number of the edited pages.
• Select the icon to move to the previous page.
• Select the icon to move to the next page.
Adds and opens a new page.
a
You cannot use features that are not described here.
Draw on the Projected Image Using Annotation Mode
115
Annotation mode lets you project from a computer, tablet, video device, or
other source and add notes to your projected content using the interactive
pens or your finger (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui). You can use both pens at the
same time. You can also use both pens and your finger at the same time.
gg Related Links
• "Starting Annotation Mode" p.115
• "Annotation Mode Toolbar" p.116
• "Annotation Mode Bottom Toolbar" p.117
• "Using Drawing Contents of Annotation Mode" p.118
Starting Annotation Mode
To draw on the projected screen using annotation mode, you need to display
the annotation mode toolbar and bottom toolbar.
a
Project an image from a connected device.
b
Hold an interactive pen close to the projected screen or tap the
projected screen using your finger (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui).
c
To write or draw, tap the or toolbar tab.
You see the toolbar on the projected image, for example:
A
Annotation mode drawing toolbar
B
Annotation mode bottom toolbar
When the toolbars are displayed, you can write on the projected screen
using the interactive pen or your finger.
The drawing toolbar provides drawing tools such as a pen and other
tools.
The bottom toolbar provides additional tools, such as tools for
controlling the projector or saving the projected screen.
a
• You can move the toolbar by tapping and dragging the bar at
the top or bottom of the toolbar.
• You can move the bottom toolbar right and left by tapping and
dragging the right or left end of the bar.
• To switch the annotation mode to whiteboard mode, press the
[Whiteboard] button on the control pad or the remote control,
or tap and drag the or annotation mode tab.
Draw on the Projected Image Using Annotation Mode
116
Annotation Mode Toolbar
The annotation mode toolbar lets you draw and write on the projected screen.
The annotation mode toolbar is shown in the following illustration.
Shows or hides the toolbar. You can move the tabs up and
down.
Switches to computer interactive mode to operate the
computer while drawing.
• Select then to switch to computer interactive
mode. After switching mode, content drawn using
annotation mode is retained.
• Select then to switch back to annotation mode.
a
• If the icon is not displayed, set the
Pen Mode Icon setting to On in the
projector's Extended menu.
s Extended > Display > Pen Mode
Icon
• You can also switch to computer
interactive mode by doing the following:
• Pressing the [Pen Mode] button on the
remote control.
• Changing the Pen Mode setting from
the projector's Extended menu.
s Extended > Easy Interactive
Function > Pen Mode
Splits the screen and displays the whiteboard screen. You can
move the tabs up and down.
• To enlarge one image while reducing the other image during
split screen projection, tap and drag the tab.
• To switch to whiteboard mode, tap and drag the tab to the
edge of the screen.
Switches to computer interactive mode.
Undoes the last operation.
Draw on the Projected Image Using Annotation Mode
117
Redoes the last undo.
Writes or draws free-form lines with custom pen.
Select the icon to change custom pen color and width.
Writes or draws free-form lines with a transparent highlighter
pen.
Select the icon to change highlighter pen color and width.
Black pen (fine point on left, thick on right).
Red pen (fine point on left, thick on right).
Blue pen (fine point on left, thick on right).
Eraser (thin width on left, thick on right).
Clears all drawings.
Hides or shows the toolbar while drawing.
: The toolbar is hidden while drawing.
: The toolbar is always displayed.
Closes the toolbar.
Displays which tool you are using with your pen or
finger .
: Using pen tools. The color of the icon indicates the color
of the pen.
: Using eraser tools.
: Using your pen or finger as a mouse.
Annotation Mode Bottom Toolbar
The annotation mode bottom toolbar allows you to save, print your pages, or
control the various projector features. The annotation mode bottom toolbar is
shown in the following illustration.
Displays the Home screen.
Takes a snapshot of the projected screen. After taking
the snapshot, the image is pasted onto a new page in
whiteboard mode.
Prints the projected screen.
Draw on the Projected Image Using Annotation Mode
118
Saves the projected screen in JPG format.
Shares the current screen using Epson iProjection
software.
Changes the image source using the displayed list.
To close the image source list, select the icon at
the top of the list.
Enlarges or reduces the projected image.
Turns the video and audio off. Tap the screen to turn
the video and audio back on.
Pauses video action.
Increases or decreases the volume.
Splits the screen to project two images at once.
While performing the split screen projection, select this
icon to make detailed settings to use the interactive
features in the split screen projection.
Shows or hides the bottom toolbar. The tab can be
moved right and left.
a
You cannot capture images or print and save content that is protected
by HDCP.
Using Drawing Contents of Annotation Mode
You can share drawing content created in annotation mode by saving and
printing the data.
gg Related Links
• "Saving Drawing Contents in Annotation Mode" p.118
• "Printing Drawing Contents in Annotation Mode" p.118
Saving Drawing Contents in Annotation Mode
You can save drawing content you created on the projected screen to a USB
storage device or a network folder. You can save in JPEG format. The file is
saved in the location set in the Save menu under the projector's Whiteboard
Settings menu. An error occurs if you cannot access the set location. The file
name is set automatically.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings > Save
Select the icon on the bottom toolbar.
The file is saved automatically.
Printing Drawing Contents in Annotation Mode
You can print the drawing content you created using the printer settings in
the Print menu under the projector's Whiteboard Settings menu. An error
occurs if a printer is not connected.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings > Print
a
Select the icon on the bottom toolbar.
The Print screen is displayed.
Draw on the Projected Image Using Annotation Mode
119
b
Specify the number of copies on the Print screen (up to 20 sheets).
c
Select Print.
Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen (Computer Interactive Mode)
120
When the projector is connected to a computer with a USB cable, you can
operate the computer from the projected screen using the interactive pens or
your finger (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui), just as you would with a mouse. You can
navigate, select, and interact with your computer programs from the projected
screen.
a
• When you use multiple displays with Windows 7 or later and use
computer interactive mode on the secondary display, make the
following settings:
• Set the Pen Operation Mode setting to Windows/Mac Mode in
the Easy Interactive Function setting in the projector's Extended
menu.
• Go to Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Table PC Settings
> Setup to launch the setup program and configure the interactive
features.
If you set up a third display, you cannot use interactive features with
that display.
You cannot write or draw across multiple screens.
• To use computer interactive mode over a network, you need to
install Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac).
gg Related Links
• "Computer Interactive Mode System Requirements" p.120
• "Using Computer Interactive Mode" p.121
• "Adjusting the Pen Operation Area" p.123
• "Installing Easy Interactive Driver on Mac" p.125
Computer Interactive Mode System Requirements
Your computer must use one of the following operating systems to use the
computer interactive mode.
Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen (Computer Interactive Mode)
121
Windows
Windows Vista Service Pack 2
• Ultimate (32-bit)
• Enterprise (32-bit)
• Business (32-bit)
• Home Premium (32-bit)
• Home Basic (32-bit)
Windows 7 Service Pack 1
• Ultimate (32- and 64-bit)
• Enterprise (32- and 64-bit)
• Professional (32- and 64-bit)
• Home Premium (32- and 64-bit)
Windows 8
• Windows 8 (32- and 64-bit)
• Windows 8 Pro (32- and 64-bit)
• Windows 8 Enterprise (32- and 64-bit)
Windows 8.1
• Windows 8.1 (32- and 64-bit)
• Windows 8.1 Pro (32- and 64-bit)
• Windows 8.1 Enterprise (32- and 64-bit)
Windows 10
• Windows 10 Home (32- and 64-bit)
• Windows 10 Pro (32- and 64-bit)
Mac
OS X
• OS X 10.7.x
• OS X 10.8.x
• OS X 10.9.x
• OS X 10.10.x
• OS X 10.11.x
macOS
• 10.12.x
• 10.13.x
Ubuntu
Ubuntu
• 16.04 LTS
• 16.10
• 17.04
• 17.10
Using Computer Interactive Mode
You can control your computer programs from the projected screen using
computer interactive mode.
a
If you are using Mac, install the Easy Interactive Driver on your
computer the first time you use the interactive features.
b
Connect the projector to your computer using a USB cable.
a
• When using the control pad, you need to connect the
projector, the control pad, and your computer using USB
cables.
• When using computer interactive mode over a network, you
do not need a USB cable.
c
Turn on the projector.
d
Project your computer screen.
Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen (Computer Interactive Mode)
122
e
Press the [Menu] button, select the Extended menu, and then press
[Enter].
f
Select the USB Type B setting, and then press the [Enter] button.
g
Select one of the following:
• To use computer interactive mode with a computer cable, an HDMI
cable, or over a network, select Easy Interactive Function.
• To use computer interactive mode and USB Display at the same
time, select USB Display/Easy Interactive Function.
a
• When projecting using USB Display, response time may be
slower.
• Using two interactive pens at the same time may cause
interference in some applications. Move the unused interactive
pen away from the projection screen.
• Select the Pen Operation Mode setting in the Easy Interactive
Function setting in the projector's Extended menu according
to the operating system of the connected computer.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > Pen Operation
Mode
h
Press the [Menu] button to exit the menus.
i
Make sure you have calibrated the first time you use your projector.
j
Hold an interactive pen close to the projected screen, or touch the
projected screen with your finger.
The icon is displayed on the projected screen.
Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen (Computer Interactive Mode)
123
a
• The icon is displayed on the right the first time. Next
time, it is displayed on the side from which you last opened the
toolbar.
• If the icon is not displayed, set the Pen Mode Icon
setting to On in the projector's Extended menu.
s Extended > Display > Pen Mode Icon
k
Select the icon, and then select the icon.
a
You can also change to computer interactive mode by doing the
following:
• Pressing the [Pen Mode] button on the remote control.
• Changing the Pen Mode setting on the projector's Extended
menu to PC Interactive.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > Pen Mode
You can now operate the computer using the interactive pen or your finger.
You can also operate the following:
• The Tablet PC input panel in Windows 7 or Windows Vista.
• Ink Tools for annotation in Microsoft Office applications.
gg Related Links
• "Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools" p.133
• "Pen Calibration" p.82
• "Easy Interactive Driver System Requirements" p.297
• "Installing Easy Interactive Driver on Mac" p.125
• "Using the Interactive Features over a Network" p.132
• "Calibrating for Touch Operations with Your Finger" p.87
Adjusting the Pen Operation Area
The pen operation area is normally adjusted automatically if you connect a
different computer or adjust the computer's resolution. If you notice that the
pen position is incorrect when you operate your computer from the projected
screen (computer interactive mode), you can adjust the pen area manually.
a
Manual adjustment is not available when projecting from a LAN
source.
a
Switch to computer interactive mode, if necessary.
b
Press the [Menu] button, select the Extended menu, and then press
[Enter].
Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen (Computer Interactive Mode)
124
c
Select the Easy Interactive Function setting and press [Enter].
d
In the PC Interactive section, select Advanced, and then press [Enter].
e
Select Manual Adj. Pen Area and press the [Enter] button.
a
When Auto Adjust Pen Area is set to On, change to Off.
f
Select Yes and press the [Enter] button.
The mouse pointer moves toward the top left corner.
g
When the mouse pointer stops at the top left corner of the image, touch
the tip of the pointer with the pen.
The mouse pointer moves toward the bottom right corner.
Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen (Computer Interactive Mode)
125
h
When the mouse pointer stops at the bottom right corner of the image,
touch the tip of the pointer with the pen.
gg Related Links
• "Using Computer Interactive Mode" p.121
Installing Easy Interactive Driver on Mac
Install Easy Interactive Driver on your computer to use computer interactive
mode.
a
You may have already installed Easy Interactive Tools using the Easy
Install option, which also installs Easy Interactive Driver. See the Easy
Interactive Tools Operation Guide in the Document CD-ROM for
details.
a
Turn on your computer.
b
Insert the EPSON Projector Software for Easy Interactive Function CD
into the computer.
You see the EPSON window.
c
Double-click the Install Navi icon in the EPSON window.
d
Select Custom Install.
e
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.
f
Restart your computer.
Switching the Interactive Mode
126
You can easily switch the interactive mode.
• To switch between computer interactive mode and annotation mode, select
one of the following icons:
• To change from annotation mode to computer interactive mode:
• To change from computer interactive mode to annotation mode:
• To switch between annotation mode and whiteboard mode, select one of the
following tabs:
• To change from whiteboard mode to annotation mode, tap and drag the
or annotation mode tab to the edge of the screen.
• To change from annotation mode to whiteboard mode, tap and drag the
or whiteboard mode tab to the edge of the screen.
a
• You can also change the interactive mode by doing the following:
• Pressing the [Pen Mode] button on the remote control.
• Switching to PC Free Annotation or PC Interactive in the Pen
Mode setting on the projector's Extended menu.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > Pen Mode
• You can switch to computer interactive mode when the image source
is Computer, HDMI, USB Display or LAN.
• You cannot switch to computer interactive mode when the USB
Type B setting in the projector's Extended menu is set to Wireless
Mouse/USB Display.
• After changing to computer interactive mode, content drawn using
annotation mode is retained.
Selecting Network Device Display
127
If you have connected devices to the projector via a network, you can select to
project an image from those devices.
You can select the image source from computers that are running Epson
iProjection (Windows/Mac), and smartphones or tablets that are running
Epson iProjection (iOS/Android).
a
You can select any connected network device for projection, even if the
user connected using the Epson iProjection software with the
moderator feature enabled. See the Epson iProjection Operation Guide
(Windows/Mac) for details about the moderator feature.
a
Select the icon on the bottom toolbar, and then select Participant
List from the image source list.
The user selection screen is displayed.
b
Select the user name for the device you want to project from.
A
Displays the user names for network devices connected to the projector.
When displaying thumbnails, each device screen is displayed as a
thumbnail.
The icon is shown next to the user name of the currently projected
device.
B
Closes the user selection screen and returns to the previous screen.
C
Click to move to the previous page or the next page.
D
Switches the display for the user selection screen between thumbnails or
icons.
E
Refreshes the user selection screen.
When an additional user connects to the projector via a network, select
this button to update the user list.
Selecting Network Device Display
128
a
• On the user selection screen, you can use two pens or one
finger at a time.
• While the user selection screen is displayed, you cannot do the
following:
• Select a different image source
• Use other interactive features
• Control the projector from the bottom toolbar
• Connect to multiple projectors
• Hear sound from the projector (it is turned off temporarily)
• Project an image using Epson iProjection
You see the selected user's screen image.
When you change the user, repeat these steps.
a
• You cannot access the Participant List screen when connecting to
multiple projectors by using Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) and
projecting the same image (mirroring).
• If pen operations or touch operations do not work on the user
selection screen, you can return to the previous screen by pressing
the [Esc] button on the remote control or the control panel.
Connecting to a Remote Computer
129
The remote desktop connection allows you to control a remote computer
from the projected screen using the interactive pens or your finger (EB-
1460Ui/EB-1450Ui). You can also add notes to the projected content.
You can use the remote desktop connection through wired LAN and wireless
LAN. Connection speed varies depending on the communication band of the
network. We recommend using wired LAN for stable communication.
a
Make sure your computer is allowed to be controlled remotely. See
your computer manual for details.
a
Select the icon on the bottom toolbar, and then select Remote
Desktop from the image source list.
a
You can also select Remote Desktop Connection on the Home
screen.
b
Select the following connection settings on the Remote Desktop
Connection screen.
A
Enter the remote computer's IP address or FQDN (Fully Qualified
Domain Name) for the remote desktop connection. You can enter up to
64 alphanumeric characters. If you specify an FQDN, you must configure
a DNS server. You can enter a port number by adding it after the IP
address or the FQDN and separating them with a colon (IP address or
FQDN:port number).
B
Enter a user name for the remote computer. You can enter up to 32
alphanumeric characters. You can enter a domain name by adding it
before the user name and separating them with a backslash (domain\user
name).
C
Enter a password for the remote computer. You can enter up to 32
alphanumeric characters.
D
Select the remote desktop connection speed/quality.
The projection resolution of the remote computer screen varies
depending on the Quality settings:
• Speed: WXGA
• Quality: WUXGA
Connecting to a Remote Computer
130
a
• You can use an external USB keyboard connected to the USB-
A port on the control pad to enter numbers and characters.
English keyboard (101 keyboard) is supported. Using the
keyboard instead of the displayed keyboard allows you to enter
a user name or password securely.
• While the Remote Desktop Connection screen is displayed,
you cannot do the following:
• Select a different image source
• Use other interactive features
• Control the projector from the bottom toolbar
• Connect to multiple projectors
• Hear sound from the projector (it is turned off temporarily)
• You can also set the default Address, User name, and
Password using Remote Desktop Setup in the projector's
Network menu.
c
Select Connect.
You see the remote computer's screen image.
a
• The remote computer's screen is displayed from the LAN
source. To return to the remote computer's screen after
switching to other sources, press the [LAN] button on the
remote control.
• You can also use an external USB keyboard to enter numbers
and characters during the remote desktop connection. You can
change the keyboard layout in Windows. See Windows Help
for details.
d
To switch to annotation mode, select the icon, and then select the
icon.
a
To close the remote desktop connection, select the icon, Remote
Desktop Connection, and then Disconnect.
gg Related Links
• "Remote Desktop Connection System Requirements" p.130
• "Remote Desktop Connection Restrictions" p.131
Remote Desktop Connection System Requirements
Your computer must use one of the following operating systems to use the
remote desktop connection.
Windows
Windows 7
• Ultimate (32- and 64-bit)
• Enterprise (32- and 64-bit)
• Professional (32- and 64-bit)
Windows 8
• Windows 8 Pro (32- and 64-bit)
• Windows 8 Enterprise (32- and 64-bit)
Windows 8.1
• Windows 8.1 Pro (32- and 64-bit)
• Windows 8.1 Enterprise (32- and 64-bit)
Windows 10
• Windows 10 Pro (32- and 64-bit)
Windows Server 2008 R2
Windows Server 2012
Windows Server 2016
Connecting to a Remote Computer
131
Remote Desktop Connection Restrictions
Functional restrictions
The following functions of the remote desktop connection are not supported.
• RD Gateway
• RemoteFX
• USB redirection
• Audio transfer
Operating restrictions
• You can only use one pen or one finger at a time.
• Touch operations are available when your computer supports it and your
operating system is Windows 10, Windows 8.1, or Windows 8.
• Server authentication is not performed. Therefore, the server certificate is
not verified.
Using the Interactive Features over a Network
132
You can use your projector in computer interactive mode over a network.
If you want to annotate when using computer interactive mode over a
network, you need to use Easy Interactive Tools (or another annotation
program). Easy Interactive Tools allows you to use various drawing tools,
treat the drawing area as a page, and save your drawings as a file for a later
use. You can install Easy Interactive Tools from the EPSON Projector
Software for Easy Interactive Function CD. You can also download the
software from the Epson website.
Use Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) to setup your projector on a computer
network and use computer interactive mode over the network.
Select Use Interactive Pen on the General settings tab and Transfer layered
window on the Adjust performance tab.
See the Epson iProjection Operation Guide (Windows/Mac) for instructions.
a
• Number of pens or fingers (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui) you can use at
the same time is as follows:
• Windows: two pens and six fingers
• Mac: one pen or one finger
• The response may be slower over the network.
• You cannot change the Pen Operation Mode setting from the
projector's Extended menu.
• You can connect up to four projectors at one time using Epson
iProjection. When connected to multiple projectors, computer
interactive mode functions for any projector. Operations performed
on one projector are reflected in other projectors.
gg Related Links
• "Precautions when Connecting to a Projector on a Different Subnet" p.132
Precautions when Connecting to a Projector on a
Different Subnet
Follow these precautions when you connect to a projector on a different
subnet using Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) and use interactive features:
• Search for the projector on the network by specifying the projector's IP
address. You cannot search for it by specifying the projector name.
• Make sure that you get an echo reply back from the network projector when
sending an echo request by the ping command. When the Internet Control
Message Protocol (ICMP) option is disabled on the router, you can connect
to the projector at remote locations even if you cannot get the echo reply
back.
• Make sure the following ports are opened.
Port Protocol Usage Communication
3620 TCP/UDP For connection and
control
two-way
3621 TCP For transferring images two-way
3629 TCP For controlling projector two-way
• Make sure that the MAC address filtering and application filtering options
are configured properly on the router.
• When bandwidth management is applied for communications between
locations, and Epson iProjection goes over the controlled bandwidth, you
may not be able to connect to the projector at remote locations.
a
Epson does not guarantee the connection to the projector on a
different subnet using Epson iProjection even if you meet the above
requirements. When considering the implementation, be sure to test
the connection in your network environment.
Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools
133
If you are using Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or
Windows Vista, you can use the pen input and Ink tools to add handwritten
input and annotations to your work.
You can also use the pen input and Ink features over a network when you set
the interactive features to be available on your network.
gg Related Links
• "Enabling Windows Pen Input and Ink Features" p.133
• "Using Windows Pen Input and Ink Features" p.134
Enabling Windows Pen Input and Ink Features
If you want to use the pen input and Ink features in Windows 10, Windows
8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista, you need to adjust the pen
settings in the projector's Extended menu.
a
Press the [Menu] button, select the Extended menu, and press the
[Enter] button.
b
Select the Easy Interactive Function setting and press the [Enter]
button.
c
Select the Pen Operation Mode setting and press the [Enter] button.
d
Select Windows/Mac Mode and press [Enter].
Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools
134
Using Windows Pen Input and Ink Features
If you are using Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or
Windows Vista, you can add handwritten input and convert it to text.
If you have Microsoft Office 2007 or later, you can also use the Ink function
to add handwritten notes to a Word document, Excel spreadsheet, or
PowerPoint presentation.
a
Option names for the annotation functions may vary depending on
your version of Microsoft Office.
• To open the Touch Keyboard in Windows 10, right-click or tap and hold on
the Taskbar, then select Show touch keyboard button. Select the keyboard
icon on the screen.
• To open the Touch Keyboard in Windows 8, right-click or tap and hold on
the Taskbar, then select Toolbars > Touch Keyboard. Select the keyboard
icon on the screen, then select the pen icon.
• To open the Tablet PC input panel in Windows 7 or Windows Vista, select
> All Programs > Accessories > Tablet PC > Tablet PC Input Panel.
You can write in the box using the pen or your finger (EB-1460Ui/EB-
1450Ui), then select from a variety of options to edit and convert the text.
• To add Ink annotations in Microsoft Office applications, select the Review
menu, then select Start Inking.
a
In Microsoft Word or Excel, select the Insert tab and then click on
Start Inking.
• To annotate your PowerPoint slides in Slideshow mode, press the button on
the side of the pen or press the projection surface with your finger for about
3 seconds, then select Pointer Options > Pen from the pop-up menu.
For more information about these features, see your Windows Help.
Interactive Features when Projecting Two Images Simultaneously
135
You can simultaneously project images from two sources on the right and left
of the screen, and use the interactive features.
When using annotation mode on both screens, you can write and draw across
the screens.
a
• You can only use computer interactive mode on one of the screens.
• You can display the area where you can write and draw with a frame.
When projecting two images simultaneously, press the [Menu]
button and set the Display Drawing Area setting to On.
• The response time may be slower.
gg Related Links
• "Switching Split Screen Projection" p.135
• "Selecting Split Screen Settings for the Interactive Feature" p.136
• "Projecting Two Images Simultaneously" p.141
Switching Split Screen Projection
You can split the screen to project two images simultaneously using the
bottom toolbar or remote control. Follow the steps below to switch to the split
screen projection using the bottom toolbar.
a
In whiteboard mode, you can also split the screen by tapping and
dragging the or annotation mode tab. In annotation mode, you
can also split the screen by tapping and dragging the or
whiteboard mode tab.
a
Select the icon on the bottom toolbar.
Interactive Features when Projecting Two Images Simultaneously
136
b
Select the input sources for the left and right screen.
a
You can only select input sources that can be combined.
c
Select Switch Source.
Selecting Split Screen Settings for the Interactive
Feature
Follow the steps below to select the split screen projection settings using the
bottom toolbar.
a
Select the icon on the bottom toolbar.
The split screen setup screen is displayed.
b
Select the tab.
Interactive Features when Projecting Two Images Simultaneously
137
c
Select the following split screen settings.
• Screen Size: enlarges one image while reducing the other image.
Depending on the video input signals, the images may not appear at
the same size even if you select icon (Equal).
• Target Pen Mode: allows you to use the pen or your finger as a
mouse on either screen.
• Audio Source: selects the audio. Select icon (Auto) to hear
audio from the larger screen or the left screen.
d
Select the icon on the split screen setup screen to exit the screen.
a
You can also tap and drag the tab to enlarge one image
while reducing the other image.
Interactive Features when Projecting with Two Projectors
138
You can use your projector's interactive features while projecting with two
projectors installed side by side. Install Easy Interactive Driver Ver. 4.0 from
the Epson Projector Software for Easy Interactive Function CD-ROM.
See the Installation Guide for detailed instructions on installing multiple
projectors and making settings for the Interactive features.
a
You may not be able to write and draw across the border of the images.
gg Related Links
• "Using the Interactive Features Temporarily on Only One of the Projectors"
p.138
• "Using Multiple Projectors" p.160
• "Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model" p.40
Using the Interactive Features Temporarily on Only
One of the Projectors
When you are using the interactive features on a screen projected by two
projectors, you can temporarily use the interactive features on only one of the
projectors by selecting the following settings. This setting is only available on
the Home screen.
a
Press the [Home] button on the remote control or the icon on the
bottom toolbar.
The Home screen appears.
b
Press the icon.
Interactive Features when Projecting with Two Projectors
139
c
Select On for Use this single projector.
d
Press Close to return to the previous screen.
You can now temporarily use the interactive features using only one of
the projectors.
a
When the projector turns off, the Use this single projector
setting returns to Off.
Adjusting Projector Features
Follow the instructions in these sections to use your projector's adjustment features.
gg Related Links
• "Projecting Two Images Simultaneously" p.141
• "Projecting a PC Free Presentation" p.144
• "Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily" p.151
• "Stopping Video Action Temporarily" p.152
• "Zooming Images" p.153
• "Using the Remote Control as a Wireless Mouse" p.154
• "Using the Remote Control as a Pointer" p.156
• "Saving a User's Logo Image" p.157
• "Saving a User Pattern" p.159
• "Using Multiple Projectors" p.160
• "Projector Security Features" p.168
Projecting Two Images Simultaneously
141
You can use the split screen feature to simultaneously project two images
from different image sources. You can control the split screen feature using
the remote control or the projector menus.
a
• While using the split screen feature, other projector features may not
be available and some settings may be automatically applied to both
images.
a
Press the [Split] button on the remote control.
The currently selected input source moves to the left of the screen.
a
You can perform the same operations from Split Screen in the
projector's Settings menu.
b
Press the [Menu] button.
You see this screen:
Projecting Two Images Simultaneously
142
c
To select an input source for the other image, select the Source setting,
press [Enter], select the input source, select Execute, and press [Enter].
a
• You can only select input sources that can be combined.
• While using the split screen feature, the Source screen appears
when you change the input source from the remote control.
d
To switch images, select Swap Screens and press [Enter].
The projected images on the left and right are swapped.
e
To enlarge one image while reducing the other image, select Screen
Size, press [Enter], select a size, and press [Enter]. To exit the menu,
press [Menu].
a
Depending on the video input signals, the images may not
appear at the same size even if you select Equal.
f
To select the audio, select Audio Source, press [Enter], select an audio
option, and press [Enter]. To exit the menu, press [Menu].
a
Select Auto to hear audio from the largest screen or the left
screen.
g
To align the projected images, select Align, press [Enter], select the
setting, and press [Enter] again. To exit the menu, press [Menu].
h
To exit the split screen feature, press [Split] or [Esc].
gg Related Links
• "Unsupported Input Source Combinations for Split Screen Projection" p.142
• "Split Screen Projection Restrictions" p.143
• "Interactive Features when Projecting Two Images Simultaneously" p.135
Unsupported Input Source Combinations for Split
Screen Projection
These input source combinations cannot be projected on a split screen.
• Computer and Video
• USB Display and USB1/USB2/LAN
• USB1/USB2 and LAN
• USB1 and USB2
• LAN (Wireless) and Screen Mirroring (EB-1460Ui)
Projecting Two Images Simultaneously
143
Split Screen Projection Restrictions
Operating restrictions
The following operations cannot be performed during split screen projection.
• Setting the projector's menu
• E-Zoom
• Switching the aspect mode (the aspect mode is set to Normal)
• Operations using the [User] button on the remote control
• Auto Iris
• Light Optimizer
• Freeze (only when one of the screens is set to Whiteboard)
Image restrictions
• If you make adjustments such as Brightness, Contrast, Color Saturation,
Tint, and Sharpness in the projector's Image menu, you can apply them
only to the image on the left. Default adjustments are applied to the image
on the right. Adjustments that affect the entire projected image such as
Color Mode and Color Temp. are applied for both left and right images.
• Even if you make adjustments for Noise Reduction and Deinterlacing in
the projector's Image menu, Noise Reduction is set to 0 and Deinterlacing
is set to Off for the image on the right.
s Image > Image Enhancement > Noise Reduction
s Image > Advanced > Deinterlacing
• Even if you set Display Background to Logo in the projector's Extended
menu, the blue screen appears when no image signal is being input.
gg Related Links
• "Image Aspect Ratio" p.70
• "Color Mode" p.72
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu" p.214
• "Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu" p.216
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
• "Zooming Images" p.153
• "Setting Auto Iris" p.72
Projecting a PC Free Presentation
144
You can use your projector's PC Free feature whenever you connect a USB
device that contains compatible presentation files. This lets you quickly and
easily display a presentation and control it using the projector's remote
control.
gg Related Links
• "Supported PC Free File Types" p.144
• "Precautions on PC Free Projection" p.144
• "Starting a PC Free Slide Show" p.145
• "Starting a PC Free PDF File Presentation" p.147
• "Starting a PC Free Movie Presentation" p.148
• "PC Free Display Options" p.150
Supported PC Free File Types
You can project these types of files using the projector's PC Free feature.
a
• For best results, place your files on media that is formatted in
FAT16/32.
• If you have trouble projecting from media formatted for non-
Windows file systems, try formatting the media for Windows
instead.
File contents File type
(extension)
Details
Image .jpg Make sure the file is not:
• CMYK format
• Progressive format
• Highly compressed
• Above 8192 × 8192 resolution
.bmp Make sure the file is not:
• Above 1280 × 800 resolution
.gif Make sure the file is not:
• Above 1280 × 800 resolution
• Animated
.png Make sure the file is not:
• Above 1920 × 1200 resolution
PDF .pdf Make sure the file is not:
• Saved in PDF version 1.7 or later format
• Encrypted
Movie .avi
(Motion
JPEG)
Supports only AVI 1.0.
Make sure the file is not:
• Saved with an audio codec other than PCM or
ADPCM
• Above 1280 × 720 resolution
• Larger than 2 GB
Precautions on PC Free Projection
Note the following precautions when using PC Free features.
• You cannot use a USB key for PC Free features.
• Do not disconnect the USB storage device while it is being accessed;
otherwise, PC Free may not operate correctly.
Projecting a PC Free Presentation
145
• You may not be able to use the security features on certain USB storage
devices with PC Free features.
• When connecting a USB device that includes an AC adapter, connect the
AC adapter to an electrical outlet when you use the device with your
projector.
• Some commercially available USB card readers may not be compatible with
the projector.
• The projector can recognize up to 5 cards inserted into the connected card
reader at one time.
• You cannot correct keystone distortion while projecting in PC Free, so
correct the image shape before you begin your presentation.
• You can use the following functions while projecting in PC Free.
• Freeze
• A/V Mute
• E-Zoom
• Pointer
gg Related Links
• "Stopping Video Action Temporarily" p.152
• "Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily" p.151
• "Zooming Images" p.153
• "Using the Remote Control as a Pointer" p.156
Starting a PC Free Slide Show
After connecting a USB device to the projector, you can switch to the USB
input source and start your slide show.
a
• You can also connect a USB device to the control pad.
• You can change the PC Free operation options or add special effects
by highlighting Option at the bottom of the screen and pressing
[Enter].
• In computer interactive mode, you can operate your slide show using
the interactive pen or your finger (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui) instead of
the remote control.
a
Press the [Source Search] button on the remote control, control panel,
or control pad. Select the USB1 source.
The PC Free file list screen is displayed.
a
• If the Select Drive screen is displayed, press the arrow buttons
to select the drive and press [Enter].
• To display images on the other USB drive, highlight Select
Drive at the top of the file list screen and press [Enter].
b
Do one of the following to locate your files:
• If you need to display files inside a subfolder on your device, press
the arrow buttons to highlight the folder and press [Enter].
Projecting a PC Free Presentation
146
• To move back up a folder level on your device, highlight Back to
Top and press [Enter].
• To view additional files in a folder, highlight Next Page or Previous
Page and press [Enter], or press the [Page] up or down buttons on
the remote control.
c
Do one of the following:
• To display an individual image, press the arrow buttons to highlight
the image and press [Enter]. (Press the [Esc] button to return to the
file list screen.)
• To display a slide show of all the images in a folder, press the arrow
buttons to highlight the Slideshow option at the bottom of the screen
and press [Enter].
a
• You can change the image switching time by highlighting
Option at the bottom of the screen and pressing [Enter].
• If any file names are longer than the display area or include
unsupported symbols, the file names may be shortened or
changed only on the screen display.
d
While projecting, use the following commands to control the display:
• To rotate a displayed image, press the up or down arrow button.
You can also rotate the image by flicking it using the interactive pen
or your finger (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui).
• To move to the next or previous image, press the left or right arrow
button.
You can also move forward or backward by flicking the image using
the interactive pen or your finger (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui).
e
To stop the display, follow the on-screen instructions or press the [Esc]
button.
You return to the file list screen.
f
Turn off the USB device, if necessary, and then disconnect the device
from the projector.
gg Related Links
• "PC Free Display Options" p.150
• "Connecting to a USB Device" p.35
Projecting a PC Free Presentation
147
Starting a PC Free PDF File Presentation
After connecting a USB device to the projector, you can switch to the USB
input source and start your PDF file presentation.
a
• You can also connect a USB device to the control pad.
• You cannot do the following while presenting a PDF file from a USB
device:
• Release a password
• Display e-signatures, JPEG2000 images, transparent effects, 3D
artwork, or comments
• Play multimedia content
• Display encrypted PDF content
• Display a PDF file without a .pdf file extension
a
Press the [Source Search] button on the remote control, control panel,
or control pad. Select the USB1 source.
The PC Free file list screen is displayed.
a
• If the Select Drive screen is displayed, press the arrow buttons
to select the drive and press [Enter].
• To display images on the other USB drive, highlight Select
Drive at the top of the file list screen and press [Enter].
b
Do one of the following to locate your files:
• If you need to display files inside a subfolder on your device, press
the arrow buttons to highlight the folder and press [Enter].
• To move back up a folder level on your device, highlight Back to
Top and press [Enter].
• To view additional files in a folder, highlight Next Page or Previous
Page and press [Enter], or press the [Page] up or down buttons on
the remote control.
c
Press the arrow buttons to highlight the file and press [Enter]. (Press
the [Esc] button to return to the file list screen.)
The first page in the PDF file is displayed at full screen size.
Projecting a PC Free Presentation
148
a
If any file names are longer than the display area or include
unsupported symbols, the file names may be shortened or
changed only on the screen display.
d
While projecting a PDF file, use the following commands to control the
display:
• To move to the next or previous page, press the up or down arrow
button.
You can also move forward or backward by flicking the page using
the interactive pen or your finger (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui).
• To display a menu of pages to select from, press the [Esc] button,
press the left or right arrow button to select a page and press [Enter].
(If you press [Esc] while the select page menu is displayed, the menu
closes.)
You can also display the menu of pages by tapping and holding it
using the interactive pen or your finger (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui).
• To enlarge the view of a page to fit the screen, press [Enter]. Portrait
pages are expanded horizontally to fit the width of the screen, and
landscape pages are expanded vertically to fit the height of the
screen. To scroll the page while a page is displayed at expanded size,
press the arrow buttons. Press [Enter] again to return to standard
size display.
You can also enlarge the view of the page by tapping it using the
interactive pen or your finger (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui).
• To rotate a displayed page, press the left or right arrow button.
You can also rotate the page by flicking it from side to side using the
interactive pen or your finger (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui).
e
To stop the display, press the [Esc] button, highlight Exit, and press
[Enter].
f
Turn off the USB device, if necessary, and then disconnect the device
from the projector.
Starting a PC Free Movie Presentation
After connecting a USB device to the projector, you can switch to the USB
input source and start your movie.
a
• You can also connect a USB device to the control pad.
• You can change the PC Free operation options by highlighting
Option at the bottom of the screen and pressing [Enter].
a
Press the [Source Search] button on the remote control, control panel,
or control pad. Select the USB1 source.
Projecting a PC Free Presentation
149
The PC Free file list screen is displayed.
a
• If the Select Drive screen is displayed, press the arrow buttons
to select the drive and press [Enter].
• To display movie files on the other USB drive, highlight Select
Drive at the top of the file list screen and press [Enter].
b
Do one of the following to locate your files:
• If you need to display files inside a subfolder on your device, press
the arrow buttons to highlight the folder and press [Enter].
• To move back up a folder level on your device, highlight Back to
Top and press [Enter].
• To view additional files in a folder, highlight Next Page or Previous
Page and press [Enter], or press the [Page] up or down buttons on
the remote control.
c
To play back a movie, press the arrow buttons to highlight the file and
press [Enter].
a
• If any file names are longer than the display area or include
unsupported symbols, the file names may be shortened or
changed only on the screen display.
• If you want to play back all the movies in a folder in sequence,
select the Slideshow option at the bottom of the screen.
d
To stop movie playback, press the [Esc] button, highlight Exit, and
press [Enter].
You return to the file list screen.
e
Turn off the USB device, if necessary, and then disconnect the device
from the projector.
gg Related Links
• "PC Free Display Options" p.150
• "Connecting to a USB Device" p.35
Projecting a PC Free Presentation
150
PC Free Display Options
You can select these display options when using PC Free. To access this
screen, highlight Option at the bottom of the PC Free file list screen and press
[Enter].
Setting Options Description
Display Order Name Order Displays files in name order
Date Order Displays files in date order
Sort Order In Ascending Sorts files in first-to-last order
In Descending Sorts files in last-to-first order
Continuous Play On Displays a slide show continuously
Off Displays a slide show once
Screen Switching
Time
No Does not display the next file
automatically
1 Second to 60 Seconds Displays files for the selected time
and switches to the next file
automatically; high resolution images
may switch at a slightly slower rate
Setting Options Description
Effect No No effect
Wipe Transitions between images using a
wipe effect
Dissolve Transitions between images using a
dissolve effect
Random Transitions between images using a
random variety of effects
Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily
151
You can temporarily turn off the projected image and sound if you want to
redirect your audience's attention during a presentation. Any sound or video
action continues to run, however, so you cannot resume projection at the
point that you stopped it.
a
If you want to display an image such as a company logo or picture
when the [A/V Mute] button is pressed, you can select the screen
displayed in the A/V Mute setting in the projector's Extended menu.
s Extended > Display > A/V Mute
a
Press the [A/V Mute] button on the remote control to temporarily stop
projection and mute any sound.
b
To turn the image and sound back on, press [A/V Mute] again.
a
• The projector's power automatically turns off 30 minutes after A/V
Mute is enabled. You can disable this feature in the projector's ECO
menu.
s ECO > A/V Mute Timer
• The lamp is still operating during A/V Mute, so the lamp hours
continue to accumulate.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
• "Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu" p.240
Stopping Video Action Temporarily
152
You can temporarily stop the action in a video or computer presentation and
keep the current image on the screen. Any sound or video action continues to
run, however, so you cannot resume projection at the point that you stopped
it.
a
Press the [Freeze] button on the remote control to stop the video
action.
b
To restart the video action in progress, press [Freeze] again.
Zooming Images
153
You can draw attention to parts of a presentation by zooming into a portion
of the image and enlarging it on the screen.
a
Press the [E-Zoom] + button on the remote control.
You see a crosshair on the screen indicating the center of the zoom
area.
b
Use the following buttons on the remote control to adjust the zoomed
image:
• Use the arrow buttons to position the crosshair in the image area you
want to zoom into. To move the crosshair diagonally, press any pair
of adjacent arrow buttons at the same time.
• Press the [E-Zoom] + button repeatedly to zoom into the image area.
Press and hold the [E-Zoom] + button to zoom in more quickly.
• To pan around the zoomed image area, use the arrow buttons.
• To zoom out of the image, press the [E-Zoom] – button.
• To return to the original image size, press [Esc].
The enlarged image is projected and the enlargement ratio is displayed
on the screen.
You can enlarge the selected area to between one to four times in 25
incremental steps.
Using the Remote Control as a Wireless Mouse
154
You can use the projector's remote control as a wireless mouse so you can
control projection at a distance from the computer.
a
You can use the wireless mouse features with Windows Vista and later,
or OS X 10.7.x and later.
a
Connect the projector to a computer using the projector's USB-B,
Computer, or HDMI port.
a
The wireless mouse function does not work when projecting
images from a device connected to the HDMI1/MHL port using
an MHL cable.
b
If you connected your computer to the port other than the USB-B port,
also connect a USB cable to the projector's USB-B port and to a USB
port on your computer (for wireless mouse support).
a
You can connect your computer's USB cable to the control pad
instead of directly to the projector.
c
Start your presentation.
d
Use the following buttons on the remote control to control your
presentation:
• To move through slides or pages, press the [Page] up or down
buttons.
• To move the cursor on the screen, use the arrow buttons. To move
the cursor diagonally, press any pair of adjacent arrow buttons at the
same time.
• To left-click, press the [Enter] button once (press it twice to double-
click). To right-click, press the [Esc] button.
• To drag-and-drop, hold the [Enter] button as you move the cursor
with the arrow buttons, then release [Enter] at the destination.
Using the Remote Control as a Wireless Mouse
155
a
• If the mouse button settings are set to reverse on the computer, the
operation of the remote control buttons is also reversed.
• The Wireless Mouse function does not work under the following
conditions:
• When the projector's menu or a Help screen is displayed.
• When USB Type B is set to Easy Interactive Function or USB
Display/Easy Interactive Function from the projector's Extended
menu.
• When operating functions other than the Wireless Mouse function
(such as adjusting the volume).
However, when using the E-Zoom or Pointer function, the page up
or down function is available.
gg Related Links
• "Zooming Images" p.153
• "Using the Remote Control as a Pointer" p.156
Using the Remote Control as a Pointer
156
You can use the projector's remote control as a pointer to help you focus your
audience on important information on the screen. The default pointer shape
is an arrow. You can change the shape in the Pointer Shape setting in the
projector's Settings menu.
a
Press the [Pointer] button on the remote control.
b
Use the arrow buttons to move the pointer on the screen. To move the
pointer diagonally, press any pair of adjacent arrow buttons at the same
time.
c
Press [Esc] to remove the pointer from the screen.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu" p.216
Saving a User's Logo Image
157
You can save an image on the projector and display it whenever the projector
turns on. You can also display the image when the projector is not receiving
an input signal or when you temporarily stop projection (using A/V Mute).
This image is called the user's logo screen.
You can select a photo, graphic, or company logo as the user's logo, which is
useful in identifying the projector's owner to help deter theft. You can prevent
changes to the user's logo by setting up password protection.
a
• Once you save a user's logo, you cannot return to the factory default
logo.
• If the User's Logo Protection setting is set to On in the Password
Protection setting menu, set to Off before saving the user's logo.
• When you copy the menu settings from one projector to another
using the batch setup feature, user's logo is also copied. Do not
register the information that you do not want to share between
multiple projectors as a user's logo.
a
Display the image you want to project as the user's logo.
b
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
c
Select the Extended menu and press [Enter].
d
Select User's Logo and press [Enter].
You see a prompt asking if you want to use the displayed image as a
user's logo.
a
Adjustments such as Keystone, E-Zoom, or Aspect are
temporarily canceled when you select User's Logo.
e
Select Yes and press [Enter].
You see a selection box overlaying your image.
a
Depending on the current image signal, the screen size may
change to match the resolution of the image signal.
Saving a User's Logo Image
158
f
Use the arrow buttons to surround the image area you want to use as
the user's logo and press [Enter].
You see a prompt asking if you want to select this image area.
a
You cannot change the image area size (400 × 300 pixels).
g
Select Yes and press [Enter]. (If you want to change the selected area,
select No, press [Enter], and repeat the last step.)
You see the User's Logo zoom factor menu.
h
Select a zoom percentage and press [Enter].
You see a prompt asking if you want to save the image as the user's
logo.
i
Select Yes and press [Enter].
The user's logo is overwritten and a completion message appears.
j
Press [Esc] to exit the message screen.
k
Select the Extended menu and press [Enter].
l
Select Display and press [Enter].
m
Select when you want to display the User's Logo screen:
• To display it whenever there is no input signal, select Display
Background and set it to Logo.
• To display it whenever you turn the projector on, select Startup
Screen and set it to On.
• To display it whenever you press the [A/V Mute] button, select A/V
Mute and set it to Logo.
To prevent anyone from changing the User's Logo settings without first
entering a password, set the User's Logo Protection setting to On in the
Password Protection setting menu and set the password.
gg Related Links
• "Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily" p.151
• "Selecting Password Security Types" p.169
Saving a User Pattern
159
There are four types of patterns pre-registered in the projector, such as ruled
lines and grid patterns. You can project these patterns to aid in presentations
using the Pattern Display settings in the Settings menu.
You can also save the image that is currently being projected as a User
Pattern.
a
Once you save a User Pattern, the pattern cannot be returned to the
factory default.
a
Project the image you want to save as the User Pattern, and then press
the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
b
Select the Settings menu and press [Enter].
c
Select Pattern and press [Enter].
d
Select User Pattern and press [Enter].
You see a prompt asking if you want to use the displayed image as a
User Pattern.
a
Adjustments such as Keystone, E-Zoom, Aspect, Adjust Zoom,
or Image Shift are temporarily cancelled when you select User
Pattern.
e
Select Yes and press [Enter].
You see a prompt asking if you want to save the image as the User
Pattern.
f
Select Yes and press [Enter].
You see a completion message.
Using Multiple Projectors
160
You can combine the projected images from two or more projectors to create
one large image.
a
• Before starting projection, make sure you set Multi-Projection to On
for all of the projectors.
s Extended > Multi-Projection > Multi-Projection
• Before starting projection, make sure you select the same color mode
for all of the projectors.
s Extended > Multi-Projection > Color Mode
gg Related Links
• "Projector Identification System for Multiple Projector Control" p.160
• "Adjusting Color Uniformity" p.162
• "Adjusting the Lamp's Brightness" p.164
• "Matching the Image Colors" p.165
• "Adjusting RGBCMY" p.166
Projector Identification System for Multiple Projector
Control
When lining up multiple projectors to project images, you can correct the
brightness and color tone of each projector's image so that the images match
closely.
You can set a unique projector ID for each projector to operate them
individually using a remote control, and then correct the brightness and color
for each projector.
a
• In some cases the brightness and color tone may not match
completely even after correction.
• If brightness and color tone differences become more noticeable over
time, repeat the adjustments.
gg Related Links
• "Setting the Projector ID" p.160
• "Selecting the Projector You want to Operate" p.161
Setting the Projector ID
To control multiple projectors from a remote control, give each projector a
unique ID.
a
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
b
Select the Extended menu and press [Enter].
c
Select Multi-Projection and press [Enter].
d
Select Projector ID and press [Enter].
Using Multiple Projectors
161
e
Use the arrow buttons to select the identification number you want to
use for the projector. Then press [Enter].
f
Press [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Repeat these steps for all the other projectors you want to operate from one
remote control.
Selecting the Projector You want to Operate
After setting the projector's ID, select the ID for the projector you want to
operate using the remote control.
a
Aim the remote control at the target projector and press the [ID]
button.
The current Projector ID is displayed on the projected screen. It
disappears after about 3 seconds.
b
While holding the [ID] button, press the number button that matches
the ID of the projector you want to operate.
The projector you want to operate is selected.
c
Press the [ID] button to check if the ID-setting process worked.
You see a message displayed by the projector.
• If the remote control is listed as On, you can operate the projector
from the remote control.
Using Multiple Projectors
162
• If the remote control is listed as Off, you cannot operate the projector
from the remote control. Repeat the steps above to enable the remote
control.
a
• When you select 0 on the remote control, you can operate all
projectors regardless the Projector ID setting.
• You must select the projector ID from the remote control each
time you turn on the projector you have set it to control. When
you turn on the projector, 0 is selected as the remote control's
projector ID.
• When you set the Projector ID setting to Off, you can operate
the projector using the remote control whichever ID you select
on the remote control.
Adjusting Color Uniformity
If the color tone on the projected screen is uneven in each projector, adjust
the color tone balance using each projector's Extended menu.
a
• The color tone may not be uniform even after performing color
uniformity.
• When the Color Mode is set to Dynamic, this function is disabled.
s Image > Color Mode
• This function is disabled in whiteboard mode.
a
Press the [Menu] button, select the Extended menu, and press [Enter].
b
Select Multi-Projection and press [Enter].
Using Multiple Projectors
163
c
Select Color Uniformity and press [Enter].
d
Select Color Uniformity and press [Enter].
e
Select On and press [Enter]. Then press [Esc].
f
Select Adjustment Level and press [Enter].
g
Select the level and press [Esc].
h
Select Start Adjustments and press [Enter].
i
Select the area you want to adjust, and press [Enter].
Adjust the circumference first. Finally select All, and then adjust the
whole screen.
j
Select the color (Red, Green, or Blue) you want to adjust, and use the
left arrow button to weaken the color tone and the right arrow button
to strengthen the color tone.
a
The adjustment screen changes each time you press [Enter].
k
Press [Esc] to return to the area selection screen.
l
Repeat these steps to adjust each area.
Using Multiple Projectors
164
m
Press [Esc] to return to the previous screen.
Adjusting the Lamp's Brightness
When projecting with multiple projectors, you must adjust the brightness
setting for each projector.
Turn on all the projectors and select the Brightness Level setting in each
projector's Extended menu so that all the projectors are as bright as the
darkest lamp on the combined screen.
a
• Even after adjusting the brightness levels, the brightness of each lamp
may not match exactly.
• This function is only available when Power Consumption is set to
Normal.
s ECO > Power Consumption
a
Press the [Menu] button, select the Extended menu, and press [Enter].
b
Select Multi-Projection and press [Enter].
c
Select Brightness Level and press [Enter].
Using Multiple Projectors
165
d
Select the brightness level, and press [Enter].
e
Press [Esc] to return to the previous screen.
Matching the Image Colors
You can match the display quality of multiple projectors that will project next
to each other.
Turn on all the projectors and select the Color Matching setting in each
projector's Extended menu so that all the projectors' display quality match on
the combined screen.
a
This function is disabled in whiteboard mode.
a
Press the [Menu] button, select the Extended menu, and press [Enter].
b
Select Multi-Projection and press [Enter].
Using Multiple Projectors
166
c
Select Color Matching and press [Enter].
d
Select Adjustment Level.
There are six adjustment levels from white through gray, and up to
black. You can adjust each level individually.
e
Select Red, Green, or Blue, and adjust the color tone.
f
Select Brightness, and adjust the value.
g
Return to step 4 and adjust another level.
h
Press the [Esc] button to return to the previous screen.
Adjusting RGBCMY
You can adjust the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness settings for R (red), G
(green), B (blue), C (cyan), M (magenta), and Y (yellow) color components.
Turn on all the projectors and select the RGBCMY setting in each projector's
Extended menu so that the color tone on the combined screen becomes
entirely even.
a
This function is disabled in whiteboard mode.
a
Press the [Menu] button, select the Extended menu, and press [Enter].
Using Multiple Projectors
167
b
Select Multi-Projection and press [Enter].
c
Select RGBCMY and press [Enter].
d
Select the color to adjust, and press [Enter].
e
Do the following as necessary for each setting:
• To adjust the overall hue of the color, bluish - greenish - reddish,
adjust the Hue setting.
• To adjust the overall vividness of the color, adjust the Saturation
setting.
• To adjust the overall color brightness of the color, adjust the
Brightness setting.
f
Press [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Projector Security Features
168
You can secure your projector to deter theft or prevent unintended use by
setting up the following security features:
• Password security to prevent people who do not know the password from
using the projector, and prevent changes to the startup screen and other
settings.
This acts as an anti-theft function as the projector cannot be used even if it
is stolen, and you can limit who can use the projector.
• Button lock security to block operation of the projector using the buttons
on the control panel.
This is useful at events or shows when you want to deactivate all buttons
during projection or at schools when you want to limit button operation.
• Security cabling to physically secure the projector in place.
gg Related Links
• "Password Security Types" p.168
• "Locking the Projector's Buttons" p.171
• "Installing a Security Cable" p.172
Password Security Types
You can set up the following types of password security using one shared
password:
• Power On Protection password prevents anyone from using the projector
without first entering a password. When plugging the power cord and
turning on the projector at first time, you must enter the correct password.
This also applies to Direct Power On and Auto Power On.
• User's Logo Protection password prevents anyone from changing the
custom screen displayed when the projector turns on, when no signal is
being input, or when you use the A/V Mute feature. The custom screen
discourages theft by identifying the projector's owner.
• Network Protection password prevents anyone from changing the
projector's Network settings.
• Schedule Protection password prevents anyone from changing the
projector's schedule settings.
• Whiteboard Protection password prevents anyone from changing the
projector's Whiteboard Settings.
• Screen Mirroring Protec. password prevents anyone from changing the
projector's Screen Mirroring settings (EB‑1460Ui).
gg Related Links
• "Setting a Password" p.168
• "Selecting Password Security Types" p.169
• "Entering a Password to Use the Projector" p.170
Setting a Password
To use password security, you must set a password.
a
The default password is set to "0000". Change this to your own
password.
a
Hold down the [Freeze] button on the remote control for about 5
seconds.
You see the Password Protection setting menu.
a
If Password Protection is already activated, you must enter the
correct password to display the Password Protection setting
menu.
Projector Security Features
169
b
Select Password and press [Enter].
You see the prompt "Change the password?".
c
Select Yes and press [Enter].
a
If you select No, the Password Protection setting menu is
displayed again.
d
Hold down the [Num] button on the remote control and use the
numeric buttons to set a four-digit password.
The password displays as **** as it is entered. A confirmation prompt is
displayed when you enter the fourth digit.
e
Enter the password again.
You see the message "Password accepted". If you enter the password
incorrectly, a message is displayed prompting you to re-enter the
password.
f
Press [Esc] to return to the menu.
g
Make a note of the password and keep it in a safe place.
Selecting Password Security Types
After setting a password, you see this menu, allowing you to select the
password security types you want to use.
If you do not see this menu, hold down the [Freeze] button on the remote
control for 5 seconds until the menu appears.
• To prevent unauthorized use of the projector, select On as the Power On
Protection setting.
• To prevent changes to the User's Logo screen or related display settings,
select On as the User's Logo Protection setting.
• To prevent changes to network settings, select On as the Network
Protection setting.
Projector Security Features
170
• To prevent changes to the projector's schedule settings, select On as the
Schedule Protection setting.
• To prevent changes to the projector's Whiteboard Settings, select On as the
Whiteboard Protection setting.
• To prevent changes to the projector's Screen Mirroring settings, select On as
the Screen Mirroring Protec. setting (EB‑1460Ui).
You can attach the password protect sticker to the projector as an additional
theft deterrent.
a
Be sure to keep the remote control in a safe place; if you lose it, you will
not be able to enter the password.
Entering a Password to Use the Projector
When the password screen is displayed, enter the correct password.
a
Hold down the [Num] button on the remote control while you enter
the password using the numeric buttons.
The password screen closes.
b
If the password is incorrect, you see a message and a prompt to try
again. Enter the correct password to proceed.
Attention
• If an incorrect password is entered three times in succession, the message
"The projector's operation will be locked." is displayed for approximately
5 minutes, and the projector switches to standby mode. If this happens,
disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet, reinsert it, and turn
the projector back on. The projector displays the password entry screen
again so that you can enter the correct password.
• If you have forgotten the password, make a note of the "Request Code:
xxxxx" number that appears on the screen and contact Epson for help.
• If you continue to repeat the above operation and input the wrong
password 30 times in succession, the message "The projector's operation
will be locked. Contact Epson as described in your documentation." is
displayed and the projector does not accept any more password entries.
Contact Epson for help.
Projector Security Features
171
Locking the Projector's Buttons
You can lock the buttons on the control panel to prevent anyone from using
the projector. The projector can still be operated using the remote control.
a
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
b
Select the Settings menu and press [Enter].
c
Select Lock Setting and press [Enter].
d
Select Control Panel Lock and press [Enter].
e
Select one of these lock types and press [Enter]:
• To lock all of the projector's buttons, select Full Lock.
• To lock all buttons except the power button, select Partial Lock.
You see a confirmation prompt.
Projector Security Features
172
f
Select Yes and press [Enter].
The Control Panel Lock setting takes effect.
gg Related Links
• "Unlocking the Projector's Buttons" p.172
Unlocking the Projector's Buttons
If the projector's buttons have been locked, do one of the following to unlock
them.
• Hold down the [Enter] button on the control panel for 7 seconds. A
message is displayed and the lock is released.
• Select Off as the Control Panel Lock setting in the projector's Settings
menu.
s Settings > Lock Setting > Control Panel Lock
gg Related Links
• "Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu" p.216
Installing a Security Cable
You can install the security cable on the projector to deter theft.
• Use the security slot on the projector to attach a Kensington Microsaver
Security system.
a
For more details on the Microsaver Security System, see
http://www.kensington.com/.
• Use the security cable attachment point on the projector to attach a wire
cable and secure it to a room fixture or heavy furniture.
a
You can use a commercially available theft-prevention wire lock. See
the documentation supplied with the wire lock for locking
instructions.
Using the Projector on a Network
Follow the instructions in these sections to set up your projector for use on a network.
gg Related Links
• "Wired Network Projection" p.174
• "Wireless Network Projection" p.177
• "Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring)" p.185
• "Secure HTTP" p.190
Wired Network Projection
174
You can send images to your projector through a wired network. To do this,
connect the projector to your network, and then set up your projector and
computer for network projection.
After connecting and setting up the projector as described here, install Epson
iProjection (Windows/Mac) from the Epson Projector Software CD-ROM (if
available) or Web site.
Epson iProjection software sets up your computer for network projection. It
also allows you to hold interactive meetings by projecting user's computer
screens over a network. See the Epson iProjection Operation Guide
(Windows/Mac) for instructions.
gg Related Links
• "Connecting to a Wired Network" p.174
• "Selecting Wired Network Settings" p.174
Connecting to a Wired Network
To connect the projector to a wired local area network (LAN), use a 100Base-
TX or 10Base-T network cable. To ensure proper data transmission, use a
Category 5 shielded cable or better.
a
Connect one end of the network cable to your network hub, switch, or
router.
b
Connect the other end of the cable to the projector's LAN port.
Selecting Wired Network Settings
Before you can project from computers on your network, you need to select
network settings on the projector.
a
Make sure you already connected the projector to your wired network
using the LAN port.
a
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
Wired Network Projection
175
b
Select the Network menu and press [Enter].
c
Select Network Configuration and press [Enter].
d
Select the Basic menu and press [Enter].
e
Select the basic options as necessary.
• Projector Name lets you enter a name up to 16 alphanumeric
characters long to identify the projector over the network.
• PJLink Password lets you enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric
characters long for using the PJLink protocol for projector control.
• Remote Password lets you enter a password up to 8 alphanumeric
characters long for accessing the projector using the Web Remote.
(User name is EPSONREMOTE; default password is guest.)
• Web Control Password lets you enter a password up to 8
alphanumeric characters long for accessing the projector over the
Web. (User name is EPSONWEB; default password is admin.)
• Moderator Password lets you enter a four-digit number password
for accessing the projector as a moderator using Epson iProjection.
(No password is set by default.)
• Projector Keyword lets you turn on a security password to prevent
access to the projector by anyone not in the room with it. You must
enter a displayed, randomized keyword from a computer using
Epson iProjection to access the projector and share the current
screen.
• Display LAN Info. lets you set the display format for the projector's
network information.
a
Use the displayed keyboard to enter numbers and characters.
Press the arrow buttons on the remote control to highlight
characters and press [Enter] to select them.
EB＊＊＊＊＊＊
Wired Network Projection
176
f
Select the Wired LAN menu and press [Enter].
g
Select IP Settings and press [Enter].
h
Select your IP Settings as necessary.
• If your network assigns addresses automatically, set the DHCP
setting to On.
• If you must set addresses manually, set the DHCP setting to Off and
enter the projector's IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway
Address as necessary.
a
To highlight the numbers you want from the displayed keyboard,
press the arrow buttons on the remote control. To select a
highlighted number, press [Enter].
i
To prevent the IP address from being displayed on the LAN standby
screen and Home screen, set the IP Address Display setting to Off.
j
When you finish selecting settings, select Complete and follow the on-
screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.
k
Press the [LAN] button on the remote control.
The wired network settings complete when you see the correct IP
address on the LAN standby screen.
Wireless Network Projection
177
You can send images to your projector through a wireless network.
To do this, you must install the Epson 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN module, and
then set up your projector and computer for wireless projection using the
projector's Network menus.
After installing the wireless LAN module and setting up the projector, install
the network software from the Epson Projector Software CD-ROM (if
available) or download the software, as necessary. Use the following software
and documentation to set up and control wireless projection:
• Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software allows you to hold interactive
meetings by projecting the computer screens of users over a network. See
the Epson iProjection Operation Guide (Windows/Mac) for instructions.
• Epson iProjection (iOS/Android) app allows you to project from iOS or
Android devices.
You can download Epson iProjection from the App Store or Google Play.
Any fees incurred when communicating with the App Store or Google Play
are the responsibility of the customer.
• Epson iProjection (Chromebook) app allows you to project from
Chromebook devices.
You can download Epson iProjection from the Chrome Web Store. Any fees
incurred when communicating with the Chrome Web Store are the
responsibility of the customer.
gg Related Links
• "Installing the Wireless LAN Module" p.177
• "Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually" p.178
• "Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows" p.180
• "Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Mac" p.180
• "Setting Up Wireless Network Security" p.180
• "Using a QR Code to Connect a Mobile Device" p.182
• "Using a USB Key to Connect a Windows Computer" p.183
Installing the Wireless LAN Module
To use the projector over a wireless network, install the Epson 802.11b/g/n
wireless LAN module. Do not install any other type of wireless LAN module.
Attention
Never remove the module while its indicator is blue or flashing, or while you are
projecting wirelessly. This could damage the module or lose data.
a
Remove both of the cable cover screws to open the cable cover.
Wireless Network Projection
178
b
Connect the Wireless LAN module to the wireless LAN module slot.
Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually
Before you can project from your wireless network, you need to select
network settings for the projector.
a
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
b
Select the Network menu and press [Enter].
c
Select On as the Wireless LAN Power setting.
d
Select Network Configuration and press [Enter].
e
Select the Basic menu and press [Enter].
Wireless Network Projection
179
f
Select the basic options as necessary.
• Projector Name lets you enter a name up to 16 alphanumeric
characters long to identify the projector over the network.
• PJLink Password lets you enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric
characters long for using the PJLink protocol for projector control.
• Remote Password lets you enter a password up to 8 alphanumeric
characters long for accessing the projector using the Web Remote.
(User name is EPSONREMOTE; default password is guest.)
• Web Control Password lets you enter a password up to 8
alphanumeric characters long for accessing the projector over the
Web. (User name is EPSONWEB; default password is admin.)
• Moderator Password lets you enter a four-digit number password
for accessing the projector as a moderator using Epson iProjection.
(No password is set by default.)
• Projector Keyword lets you turn on a security password to prevent
access to the projector by anyone not in the room with it. You must
enter a displayed, randomized keyword from a computer using
Epson iProjection to access the projector and share the current
screen.
• Display LAN Info. lets you set the display format for the projector's
network information.
a
Use the displayed keyboard to enter numbers and characters.
Press the arrow buttons on the remote control to highlight
characters and press [Enter] to select them.
g
Select the Wireless LAN menu and press [Enter].
h
Select the Connection Mode setting.
• Quick lets you connect to multiple smartphones, tablets, or
computers directly using wireless communication.
• Advanced lets you connect to smartphones, tablets, or computers
over a wireless network access point.
i
If you selected the Advanced connection mode, select Search Access
Point to select the access point you want to connect to.
a
If you need to assign the SSID manually, select SSID to enter the
SSID.
j
For the Advanced connection mode, assign the IP settings for your
network as necessary.
• If your network assigns addresses automatically, select IP Settings to
set the DHCP setting to On.
• If you must set addresses manually, select IP Settings to set the
DHCP setting to Off, and then enter the projector's IP Address,
Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address as necessary.
EB＊＊＊＊＊＊
Wireless Network Projection
180
k
To prevent the SSID or IP address from being displayed on the LAN
standby screen and Home screen, set the SSID Display setting or the IP
Address Display setting to Off.
l
When you have finished selecting settings, select Complete and then
follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the
menus.
m
Press the [LAN] button on the remote control.
The wireless network settings are complete when you see the correct IP
address on the LAN standby screen.
When you have finished making wireless settings for your projector, you need
to select the wireless network on your computer. Then start the network
software to send images to your projector through a wireless network.
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows
Before connecting to the projector, select the correct wireless network on your
computer.
a
To access your wireless utility software, click the network icon on the
Windows taskbar.
b
When connecting in Advanced connection mode, select the network
name (SSID) of the network the projector is connecting to.
c
Click Connect.
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Mac
Before connecting to the projector, select the correct wireless network in Mac.
a
Click the Wi-Fi icon on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
b
When connecting in Advanced connection mode, make sure Wi-Fi is
turned on and select the network name (SSID) of the network the
projector is connecting to.
Setting Up Wireless Network Security
You can set up security for your projector to use on a wireless network. Set up
one of the following security options to match the settings used on your
network:
• WPA2-PSK security
• WPA2-EAP security *
• WPA/WPA2-PSK security *
• WPA/WPA2-EAP security *
* Only available for the Advanced connection mode.
a
Contact your network administrator for guidance on entering the
correct information.
a
If you want to set up the WPA2-EAP or WPA/WPA2-EAP security,
make sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector
registration and placed directly on the USB storage device.
Wireless Network Projection
181
b
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
c
Select the Network menu and press [Enter].
d
Select Network Configuration and press [Enter].
e
Select the Wireless LAN menu and press [Enter].
f
Select the Security setting and press [Enter].
g
Select the security settings to match your network settings.
h
Do one of the following according to the security you selected.
• WPA2-PSK, WPA/WPA2-PSK: Select Complete and follow the on-
screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.
• WPA2-EAP, WPA/WPA2-EAP: Select EAP Method and press
[Enter].
i
Select the protocol for authentication as the EAP Type setting.
j
To import your certificate, select the certificate type and press [Enter].
• Client Certificate for the PEAP-TLS or EAP-TLS type
• CA certificate for the PEAP, PEAP-TLS, EAP-TLS, or EAP-FAST
type
a
You can also register the digital certificates from your Web
browser. However, be sure to register just once or the certificate
may not install correctly.
k
Select Register and press [Enter].
l
Follow the on-screen instructions to connect a USB storage device to
the projector's USB-A port.
m
Press [Enter] to display the certificate list.
n
Select the certificate to import using the displayed list.
A message is displayed prompting you to enter the password for the
certificate.
o
Enter a password and press [Enter].
The certificate is imported and a completion message appears.
Wireless Network Projection
182
p
Select your EAP settings as necessary.
• User name lets you enter a user name using up to 64 alphanumeric
characters. To enter more than 32 characters, use your Web browser.
When importing a client certificate, the name the certificate was
issued to is automatically set.
• Password lets you enter a password using up to 64 alphanumeric
characters for authentication when using the PEAP, EAP-FAST, or
LEAP type. To enter more than 32 characters, use your Web
browser.
• Verify Server Cert. lets you select whether or not to verify the server
certificate when a CA certificate has been set.
• RADIUS Serv.Name lets you enter the server name to be verified.
q
When you have finished making settings, select Complete and follow
the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.
gg Related Links
• "Supported Client and CA Certificates" p.182
• "Network Menu - Wireless LAN Menu" p.234
Supported Client and CA Certificates
You can register these types of digital certificates.
Client Certificate (PEAP-TLS/EAP-TLS)
Specification Description
Format PKCS#12
Extension PFX, P12
Encryption RSA
Hashes MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512
Key length 512/1024/2048/4096 bit
Password * Up to 32 alphanumeric characters; required
CA Certificate (PEAP/PEAP-TLS/EAP-TLS/EAP-FAST)
Specification Description
Format X509v3
Extension DER/CER/PEM
Encryption RSA
Hashes MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512
Key length 512/1024/2048/4096 bit
Encoding BASE64/Binary
* You can set a password using up to 64 alphanumeric characters. However,
you need to use your Web browser to enter more than 32 characters.
Using a QR Code to Connect a Mobile Device
After selecting the wireless network settings for your projector, you can
display a QR code on the screen and use it to connect a mobile device using
the Epson iProjection (iOS/Android) app.
Wireless Network Projection
183
a
• Make sure you have installed the latest version of Epson iProjection
on your device (V1.3.0 or later supports this feature).
• You can download Epson iProjection for free from the App Store or
Google Play. Any fees incurred when communicating with the App
Store or Google Play are the responsibility of the customer.
• When using Epson iProjection in Quick connection mode, we
recommend making security settings.
a
Press the [LAN] button on the remote control.
The QR code is displayed on the projected surface.
a
• If you do not see the QR code, set the Display LAN Info.
setting to Text & QR Code in the projector's Network menu.
s Network > Network Configuration > Basic > Display
LAN Info.
• To hide the QR code, press the [Esc] button.
• When the QR code is hidden, press the [Enter] button to
display the code.
• You can also display the QR code by selecting the icon on the
Home screen.
b
Start Epson iProjection on your mobile device.
c
Read the projected QR code using Epson iProjection to connect it to
the projector.
a
To correctly read the QR code, make sure you face the screen
squarely and closely enough so that the projected code fits into
the guide of the mobile device's QR code reader. If you are too
far from the screen, the code may not be read.
When a connection is established, select Contents menu from , and
then select the file you want to project.
Using a USB Key to Connect a Windows Computer
You can set up your USB flash drive as a USB key to quickly connect the
projector to a wireless LAN supported Windows computer. After creating the
USB key, you can quickly project images from the network projector.
a
Set up the USB key using Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software.
a
See the Epson iProjection Operation Guide (Windows/Mac) for
instructions.
b
Make sure the wireless LAN module is installed into your projector.
c
Turn on the projector.
d
Press the [LAN] button on the remote control.
The LAN standby screen is displayed. Verify that an SSID and IP
address are displayed.
e
Connect the USB key to the projector's USB-A port.
You see a projected message that the network information update is
complete.
f
Remove the USB key.
g
Connect the USB key to a USB port on your computer.
a
In Windows Vista, if the AutoPlay window is displayed, select
MPPLaunch.exe, then select Allow.
h
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the necessary application.
Wireless Network Projection
184
a
• If the Windows Firewall message is displayed, click Yes to
disable the firewall.
• You need administrator authority to install the software.
• If it is not installed automatically, double-click
MPPLaunch.exe in the USB key.
After a few minutes, your computer image is displayed by the projector.
i
When you have finished projecting wirelessly, select the Safely Remove
Hardware option in the Windows taskbar, and then remove the USB
key from your computer.
a
You may need to restart your computer to reactivate your
wireless LAN connection.
Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring)
185
You can send image to your projector from mobile devices such as laptops,
smartphones, and tablets using Miracast technology (EB-1460Ui).
If your device supports Miracast, you do not need to install any additional
software. When using a Windows computer, make sure the necessary adapter
for the Miracast connection is available.
Note the following limitations when using Screen Mirroring features.
• You cannot play an interlaced image.
• You cannot play multi-channel audio over 3ch (channel 3).
• You cannot project images with a resolution above 1920 × 1080 and a frame
rate above 30 fps.
• You cannot play 3D video.
• You may not be able to view contents with copyright protection with a
Miracast connection depending on your device.
• Do not change the projector's Screen Mirroring Settings during Screen
Mirroring projection. Doing so may cause the projector to disconnect and it
may take a while to re-connect.
s Network > Screen Mirroring Settings
• Do not turn off the projector directly by the breaker during Screen
Mirroring projection.
a
Mobile devices with Android installed or Windows 8.1 or later installed
mainly support Miracast.
Support for Miracast varies depending on the mobile device. See your
mobile device manual for details.
gg Related Links
• "Selecting Screen Mirroring Settings" p.185
• "Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 10" p.187
• "Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 8.1" p.188
• "Connecting Using Screen Mirroring with the Miracast Function" p.189
Selecting Screen Mirroring Settings
You must select Screen Mirroring settings for your projector to project images
from your mobile device.
a
If you set a Screen Mirroring Protec. password, turn off your Screen
Mirroring Protec. password first.
a
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
b
Select the Network menu and press [Enter].
Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring)
186
c
Select On as the Screen Mirroring setting.
d
Select Screen Mirroring Settings and press [Enter].
e
Set the Display Name setting as necessary.
f
Select the Operation Mode setting.
• Basic lets you connect with basic options.
• Extended lets you connect with advanced options.
g
Select the Basic setting as necessary.
• Wireless LAN Sys. lets you select the type of wireless LAN system
the projector is connecting to.
• Adjust Image Quality lets you adjust the screen mirroring
speed/quality. Select a small number to improve the quality and
select large number to increase the speed.
• Connection Mode lets you select the type of WPS (Wi-Fi Protected
Setup). Available only for the Basic operation mode.
h
For the Extended operation mode, select the Extended setting.
• Meeting Mode lets you select the type of meeting. Select
Interruptions OK to connect to another mobile device during
Screen Mirroring projection or No Interruptions to exclusively
connect to one device.
• Channel lets you select the wireless channel used by Screen
Mirroring.
Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring)
187
i
Select the Display setting as necessary.
• Display PIN Code lets you display the PIN code on the projected
image while projecting input sources other than Screen Mirroring.
• Display Device Name lets you display the newly connected device
name on the projected image while projecting input sources other
than Screen Mirroring.
j
When you finish selecting settings, select Set and follow the on-screen
instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.
k
Press the [Home] button on the control panel or remote control. The
settings are complete when you see the Display Name on the Home
screen.
Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 10
You can set up your computer for wireless projection and play audio through
the projector's speaker system by connecting using Screen Mirroring.
a
Select Screen Mirroring Settings on your projector as necessary.
b
Press the [LAN] button on the remote control to switch to the Screen
Mirroring source.
You see the Screen Mirroring standby screen.
c
Display Action Center, and then select Connect.
You see a list of available devices.
d
Select the projector's Display Name from the list.
e
If you see the PIN entry screen on your computer, enter the PIN code
displayed on the Screen Mirroring standby screen or at the bottom
right of the projected image.
The projector displays the image from your computer.
Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring)
188
a
It may take some time until the connection is established. While
connecting, do not disconnect the projector's power cord. Doing
so may cause your device to freeze or malfunction.
Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 8.1
You can set up your computer for wireless projection from Charms in
Windows 8.1. You can play audio through the projector's speaker system by
connecting using Screen Mirroring.
a
Select Screen Mirroring Settings on your projector as necessary.
b
Press the [LAN] button on the remote control to switch to the Screen
Mirroring source.
You see the Screen Mirroring standby screen.
c
On your computer, select Devices from Charms and select Project.
d
Select Add a wireless display.
You see a list of available devices.
e
Select the projector's Display Name from the list.
f
If you see the PIN entry screen on your computer, enter the PIN code
displayed on the Screen Mirroring standby screen or at the bottom
right of the projected image.
The projector displays the image from your computer.
Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring)
189
a
It may take some time until the connection is established. While
connecting, do not disconnect the projector's power cord. Doing
so may cause your device to freeze or malfunction.
Connecting Using Screen Mirroring with the Miracast
Function
If your mobile device such as a smartphone supports Miracast, you can
connect it to the projector wirelessly and project images. You can play audio
through the projector's speaker system by connecting using Screen Mirroring.
a
Select Screen Mirroring Settings on your projector as necessary.
b
Press the [LAN] button on the remote control to switch to the Screen
Mirroring source.
You see the Screen Mirroring standby screen.
c
On your mobile device, use your Miracast function to search for the
projector.
You see a list of available devices.
d
Select the projector's Display Name from the list.
e
If you see the PIN entry screen on your mobile device, enter the PIN
code displayed on the Screen Mirroring standby screen or at the bottom
right of the projected image.
The projector displays the image from your mobile device.
a
It may take some time until the connection is established. While
connecting, do not disconnect the projector's power cord. Doing
so may cause your device to freeze or malfunction.
Depending on the mobile device, you may need to delete a device
when connecting. Follow the on-screen instructions on your
device.
Secure HTTP
190
You can use the HTTPS protocol to increase security between the projector
and a Web browser communicating with it. To do this, you create a server
certificate, install it on the projector, and turn on the Secure HTTP setting in
the projector menus to verify the reliability of the Web browser.
s Network > Network Configuration > Others > Secure HTTP
Even if you do not install a server certificate, the projector automatically
creates a self-signed certificate and allows communication. However, because
the self-signed certificate cannot verify reliability from a Web browser, you
see a warning about the server's reliability when you access the projector from
a Web browser. This warning does not prevent communication.
gg Related Links
• "Importing a Web Server Certificate Using the Menus" p.190
Importing a Web Server Certificate Using the Menus
You can create your Web server certificate, and import it using the projector
menus and a USB flash drive.
a
You can also register the digital certificates from your Web browser.
However, be sure to register just once or the certificate may not install
correctly.
a
Make sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector
registration and directly placed on the USB storage device.
b
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
c
Select the Network menu and press [Enter].
d
Select Network Configuration and press [Enter].
e
Select the Others menu and press [Enter].
f
Select On as the Secure HTTP setting.
g
Select Web Server Cert. and press [Enter].
h
Select Register and press [Enter].
i
Follow the on-screen instructions to connect a USB storage device to
the projector's USB-A port.
j
Press [Enter] to display the certificate list.
k
Select the certificate to import using the displayed list.
A message is displayed prompting you to enter the password for the
certificate.
l
Enter a password and press [Enter].
The certificate is imported and a completion message appears.
gg Related Links
• "Supported Web Server Certificates" p.191
Secure HTTP
191
Supported Web Server Certificates
You can register these types of digital certificates.
Web Server Certificate (Secure HTTP)
Specification Description
Format PKCS#12
Extension PFX, P12
Encryption RSA
Hashes MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512
Key length 512/1024/2048/4096 bit
Common name Network host name
Organization Optional
Password * Up to 32 alphanumeric characters; required
* You can set a password using up to 64 alphanumeric characters. However,
you need to use your Web browser to enter more than 32 characters.
Monitoring and Controlling the Projector
Follow the instructions in these sections to monitor and control the projector over a network.
gg Related Links
• "Epson Projector Management" p.193
• "Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser" p.194
• "Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts" p.197
• "Setting Up Monitoring Using SNMP" p.198
• "Using ESC/VP21 Commands" p.199
• "PJLink Support" p.201
• "Crestron RoomView Support" p.202
• "Setting Projector Event Schedules" p.206
Epson Projector Management
193
Epson Projector Management software (Windows only) lets you monitor and
control your projector through the network. See the Epson Projector
Management Operation Guide for instructions.
You can download Epson Projector Management from the following Web
site.
http://www.epson.com/
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser
194
Once you have connected your projector to your network, you can select
projector settings and control projection using a compatible Web browser.
This lets you access the projector remotely.
a
• Make sure the computer and projector are connected to the network.
When projecting images using a wireless LAN, connect in Advanced
connection mode.
• You can use the following Web browsers.
• Internet Explorer 11.0 or later (Windows)
• Microsoft Edge (Windows)
• Safari (Mac)
• Safari (iOS)
• Google Chrome (Android)
• While using the Web browser, do not connect using a proxy server.
You cannot select all of the projector menu settings or control all
projector functions using a Web browser.
• If you set Standby Mode to Communication On in the projector's
ECO menu, you can use a Web browser to select settings and control
projection even if the projector is in standby mode (when the power
is off).
a
Make sure the projector is turned on.
b
Make sure your computer or device is connected to the same network
as the projector.
c
Start your Web browser on the computer or device.
d
Go to the Epson Web Control screen by entering the projector's IP
address into the browser's address box.
e
Select the icon to access the Web Control screen.
a
• You may need to log in before you see the Web Control screen.
If a login screen is displayed, enter your user name and
password. (The user name is EPSONWEB and the default
password is admin.)
• You can change the password in Web Control Password in
the projector's Network menu.
s Network > Network Configuration > Basic > Web
Control Password
f
To select projector menu settings, select the name of the menu and
follow the on-screen instructions to select settings.
a
• You cannot select the following settings using a Web browser.
• Image Shift
• HDMI Link
• Pointer Shape
• User Button
• Test Pattern
• Easy Interactive Function
• User's Logo
• USB Type B
• Language
• Event ID
• Reset Lamp Hours
• Printer Settings
• You can select the following settings only using a Web
browser.
• Monitor Password (up to 16 alphanumeric characters)
• HTTP port (port number used for Web Control except for
80 [default], 843, 3620, 3621, 3625, 3629, 4352, 4649, 5357,
10000, 10001, 41794)
g
To control projection remotely, select the icon.
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser
195
a
• If you see a log in window, enter your user name and
password. (The user name is EPSONREMOTE and the default
password is guest.)
• You can change the password in Remote Password in the
projector's Network menu.
s Network > Network Configuration > Basic > Remote
Password
h
Select the icon corresponding to the projector function you want to
control.
A
Power button control
B
Selects HDMI port source
C
Selects Computer port source
D
Freeze button control
E
A/V Mute button control
F
Page up and down button controls
G
Searches for sources
H
Selects the Whiteboard source
I
Selects the network source
J
Volume button controls
K
Displays the QR code
gg Related Links
• "Registering Digital Certificates from a Web Browser" p.195
• "Network Menu - Basic Menu" p.233
• "Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu" p.240
Registering Digital Certificates from a Web Browser
You can register the digital certificates on the projector to provide security for
your presentation files.
a
You can also register the digital certificates in the projector's Network
menu. However, be sure to register just once or the certificate may not
install correctly.
s Network > Network Configuration > Wireless LAN > EAP
Method > Client Certificate
s Network > Network Configuration > Wireless LAN > EAP
Method > CA certificate
s Network > Network Configuration > Others > Web Server
Certificate
a
Make sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector
registration.
b
Make sure the projector is turned on.
c
Start your Web browser on a computer or device connected to the
network.
Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser
196
d
Go to the Epson Web Control screen by entering the projector's IP
address into the browser's address box.
e
Select the icon to access the Web Control screen.
a
• You may need to log in before you see the Web Control screen.
If a login screen is displayed, enter your user name and
password. (The user name is EPSONWEB and the default
password is admin.)
• You can change the password in Web Control Password from
the projector's Network menu.
s Network > Network Configuration > Basic > Web
Control Password
• You need to select the Config icon to access the Web Control
screen using your mobile device.
f
Under Network, select Certificate.
You see the Web Control screen.
g
Select the certificate file you want to register.
h
Enter the password in the Password box, and then click Set.
i
When you finish registering the certificate, click Apply to finalize your
changes and complete the registration.
Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts
197
You can set up the projector to send you an e-mail alert over the network if
there is a problem with the projector.
If you set the Standby Mode setting to Communication On in the projector's
ECO menu, you can receive the e-mail alerts even if the projector is in
standby mode (when the power is off).
a
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
b
Select the Network menu and press [Enter].
c
Select Network Configuration and press [Enter].
d
Select the Notifications menu and press [Enter].
e
Set the Mail Notification setting to On.
f
Enter the IP address for the SMTP Server option.
a
Do not use these addresses: 127.x.x.x, 192.0.2.x, or 224.0.0.0
through 255.255.255.255 (where x is a number from 0 to 255).
g
Select a number for the SMTP server Port Number, from 0 to 65535
(default is 25).
h
Enter the e-mail address to be indicated as the sender in From.
i
Choose an address field, enter the e-mail address, and select the alerts
you want to receive. Repeat for up to three addresses.
a
Your e-mail address can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters
long.
j
When you finish selecting settings, select Complete and follow the on-
screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.
a
If a critical problem causes a projector to shut down, you may not
receive an e-mail alert.
gg Related Links
• "Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages" p.197
• "Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu" p.240
Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages
When a problem occurs with a projector on the network, and you selected to
receive e-mail alerts, you receive an e-mail containing the following
information:
• The email address set in From as the mail sender
• Epson Projector in the subject line
• The name of the projector experiencing a problem
• The IP address of the affected projector
• Detailed information about the problem
Setting Up Monitoring Using SNMP
198
Network administrators can install SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol) software on network computers so they can monitor projectors. If
your network uses this software, you can set up the projector for SNMP
monitoring.
a
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
b
Select the Network menu and press [Enter].
c
Select Network Configuration and press [Enter].
d
Select the Notifications menu and press [Enter].
e
Set the SNMP setting to On.
f
Enter up to two IP addresses to receive SNMP notifications, using 0 to
255 for each address field.
a
Do not use these addresses: 127.x.x.x or 224.0.0.0 through
255.255.255.255 (where x is a number from 0 to 255). This
projector supports SNMP agent version 1 (SNMPv1).
g
Enter the SNMP Community Name up to 32 alphanumeric characters
long.
h
When you have finished selecting settings, select Complete and follow
the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.
Using ESC/VP21 Commands
199
You can control the projector from an external device using ESC/VP21.
gg Related Links
• "ESC/VP21 Command List" p.199
• "Cable Layouts" p.199
ESC/VP21 Command List
When the power ON command is transmitted to the projector, the power
turns on and it enters warm-up mode. When the projector's power has turned
on, a colon ":" (3Ah) is returned.
When a command is input, the projector executes the command and returns a
":", and then accepts the next command.
If the command being processed terminates abnormally, an error message is
output and a ":" is returned.
The following commands are available.
Item Command
Power On/Off On PWR ON
Off PWR OFF
Item Command
Signal selection Computer Auto SOURCE 1F
RGB SOURCE 11
Component SOURCE 14
HDMI1/MHL SOURCE 30
HDMI2 SOURCE A0
Video SOURCE 41
USB Display SOURCE 51
USB1 SOURCE 52
LAN SOURCE 53
USB2 SOURCE 54
Whiteboard SOURCE 55
Screen Mirroring * SOURCE 56
A/V Mute On/Off On MUTE ON
Off MUTE OFF
* Screen Mirroring is available only with the EB-1460Ui.
Add a Carriage Return (CR) code (0Dh) to the end of each command and
transmit.
Contact Epson for more details.
Cable Layouts
Serial connection
• Connector shape: D-Sub 9-pin (male)
• Projector input port name: RS-232C
• Cable type: Crossover (null modem) cable
Using ESC/VP21 Commands
200
In the following illustration, the projector side is shown on the left, and the
computer side on the right:
Signal name Function
GND Signal wire ground
TD Transmit data
RD Receive data
Communications protocol
• Default baud rate setting: 9600 bps
• Data length: 8 bit
• Parity: None
• Stop-bit: 1 bit
• Flow control: None
PJLink Support
201
PJLink was established by the JBMIA (Japan Business Machine and
Information System Industries Association) as a standard protocol for
controlling network-compatible projector's as part of their efforts to
standardize projector control protocols.
The projector complies with the PJLink Class2 standard established by the
JBMIA.
The port number used for the PJLink search function is 4352 (UDP).
You need to make network settings before you can use PJLink.
It complies with all commands except for the following commands defined by
PJLink Class2, and agreement was confirmed by the PJLink standard
adaptability verification.
http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/english/
• Non-compatible commands
Function PJLink command
Mute settings Image muting set AVMT 11
Audio muting set AVMT 21
• Input ports and corresponding input source number
Input port name Input source number
Computer 11
Video 21
HDMI1/MHL 32
HDMI2 33
USB1 41
USB2 42
LAN 52
USB Display 53
Whiteboard 55
Screen Mirroring * 57
* Screen Mirroring is available only with the EB-1460Ui.
• Manufacturer name displayed for "Manufacture name information query"
EPSON
• Model name displayed for "Product name information query"
• EPSON 1460Ui/1460UT
• EPSON 1450Ui/1450UT
• EPSON 1440Ui/1440UT
Crestron RoomView Support
202
If you are using the Crestron RoomView network monitoring and control
system, you can set up your projector for use on the system. Crestron
RoomView lets you control and monitor your projector using a Web browser.
a
• You cannot use the Epson Web Control feature or the Message
Broadcasting feature in Epson Projector Management when you use
Crestron RoomView.
• If you set the Standby Mode setting to Communication On in the
projector's ECO menu, you can control the projector even if the
projector is in standby mode (when the power is off).
For additional information on Crestron RoomView, visit the Crestron Web
site.
http://www.crestron.com
To monitor devices in the system, you can use Crestron RoomView Express
or Crestron RoomView Server Edition provided by Crestron. You can
communicate with the help desk and send emergency messages. See the
following Web site for details.
http://www.crestron.com/getroomview
This manual describes how to perform operations on your computer using a
Web browser.
gg Related Links
• "Setting Up Crestron RoomView Support" p.202
• "Controlling a Networked Projector Using Crestron RoomView" p.202
Setting Up Crestron RoomView Support
To set up your projector for monitoring and control using a Crestron
RoomView system, make sure your computer and projector are connected to
the network. If you are connecting wirelessly, set up the projector using the
Advanced network connection mode.
a
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
b
Select the Network menu and press [Enter].
c
Select Network Configuration and press [Enter].
d
Select the Others menu and press [Enter].
e
Set the Crestron RoomView setting to On to allow the projector to be
detected.
f
When you have finished selecting settings, select Complete and follow
the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.
g
Turn off the projector, and then turn it on again to enable the setting.
Controlling a Networked Projector Using Crestron
RoomView
Once you have set up your projector to use Crestron RoomView, you can
control and monitor projection using a compatible Web browser.
a
Start your Web browser on a computer connected to the network.
b
Type the projector's IP address into the browser's address box and press
the computer's Enter key.
Crestron RoomView Support
203
You see this screen:
c
Select the input source that you want to control in the Sources List box.
You can scroll through available sources using the up and down arrows
in the box.
d
To control projection remotely, click the on-screen buttons that
correspond to the projector's remote control buttons. You can scroll
through button options at the bottom of the screen.
a
These on-screen buttons do not directly correspond to the
projector's remote control buttons:
• OK acts as the [Enter] button
• Menu displays the projector's menu
e
To view information about the projector, click the Info tab.
f
To change the projector, Crestron, and password settings, click the
Tools tab, select settings on the displayed screen, and then click Send.
g
When you finish selecting settings, click Exit to exit the program.
gg Related Links
• "Crestron RoomView Operation Window" p.203
• "Crestron RoomView Tools Window" p.204
Crestron RoomView Operation Window
Settings on the operation window let you control the projector and adjust the
projection image.
A
Power Turns the projector on or off.
Vol-/Vol+ Adjusts the volume.
A/V Mute Turns the video and audio on or off.
B
Switches to the image from the selected input source. To display input sources
that are not shown in Sources List, click (a) or (b) to scroll up or down. The
current video signal input source is displayed in blue.
You can change the source name if necessary.
Crestron RoomView Support
204
C
Freeze Images are paused or released.
Contrast Adjusts the difference between light and shade in the
images.
Brightness Adjusts the image brightness.
Color Adjusts the color saturation for the images.
Sharpness Adjusts the image sharpness.
Zoom Enlarges or reduces the image without changing the
projection size. Click the arrow buttons to change the
position of an enlarged image.
D
Arrow buttons Performs the same operations as the arrow buttons on
the remote control.
OK Performs the same operation as [Enter] on the remote
control.
Menu Displays and closes the projector's menu.
Auto Optimizes Tracking, Sync., and Position in the
projector's Signal menu while projecting an analog
RGB signal from Computer port.
Search Changes to the next input source that is sending an
image.
Esc Performs the same operation as the [Esc] button on the
remote control.
E
Contact IT Help Displays the Help Desk window. Used to send
messages to, and receive messages from, the
administrator using Crestron RoomView Express.
Info Displays information on the projector that is currently
connected.
Tools Changes settings in the projector that is currently
connected.
Crestron RoomView Tools Window
Settings on the Tools window let you customize various projector setup
features.
A
Make settings for Crestron central controllers.
B
Projector Name Enter a name to differentiate the projector that is
currently connected from other projectors on the
network. (up to 16 alphanumeric characters)
Location Enter an installation location name for the projector
that is currently connected on the network. (up to 32
alphanumeric characters and symbols)
Assigned To Enter a user name for the projector. (up to 32
alphanumeric characters and symbols)
DHCP Select to use DHCP. You cannot enter an IP address if
DHCP is enabled.
IP Address Enter the IP address to assign to the currently
connected projector.
Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask for the currently connected
projector.
Default Gateway Enter the gateway address for the currently connected
projector.
Send Click to confirm the changes made to the Projector.
Crestron RoomView Support
205
C
Enabled (Admin
Password)
Select to require a password to open the Tools window.
New Password Enter the new password when changing the password
to open the Tools window. (up to 26 alphanumeric
characters)
Confirm Enter the same password as you entered in New
Password. If the passwords are not the same, an error
is displayed.
Send Click to confirm the changes made to the Admin
Password.
D
Enabled (User
Password)
Select to require a password to open the operation
window on the computer.
New Password Enter the new password when changing the password
to open the operation window. (up to 26 alphanumeric
characters)
Confirm Enter the same password as you entered in New
Password. If the passwords are not the same, an error
is displayed.
Send Click to confirm the changes made to the User
Password.
Setting Projector Event Schedules
206
You can schedule up to 30 events to occur automatically on your projector,
such as turning the projector on or off or switching the input source. The
projector performs the selected events on the specified date and time in the
schedule you set up.
Warning
Do not place flammable objects in front of the lens. If you schedule the projector
to turn on automatically, flammable objects in front of the lens could catch on a
fire.
a
• If you set a Schedule Protection password, turn off your Schedule
Protection password first.
a
Set the date and time in the Date & Time menu.
s Extended > Operation > Date & Time
b
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
c
Select the Extended menu and press [Enter].
d
Select Schedule Settings and press [Enter].
e
Select Schedule and press [Enter].
f
Select Add New and press [Enter].
g
Select the event details you want to perform.
Setting Projector Event Schedules
207
h
Select the date and time at which you want the event to occur.
i
Select Save and press [Enter].
The scheduled events are displayed on the screen with icons indicating
the event status.
A
: valid schedule
: regular schedule
: invalid schedule
B
The date currently selected (highlighted in yellow)
C
: one time schedule
: regular schedule
: standby schedule (turns communication on or off during standby)
: invalid schedule
j
To edit a scheduled event, select the schedule and press [Esc].
k
Select an option from the menu displayed.
• On or Off lets you enable or disable the selected event.
Setting Projector Event Schedules
208
• Edit lets you change the event details or date and time.
• Clear lets you remove the scheduled event from a list.
l
Select Setup complete, then select Yes.
To delete all scheduled events, select Schedule Reset.
Adjusting the Menu Settings
Follow the instructions in these sections to access the projector menu system and change projector settings.
gg Related Links
• "Using the Projector's Menus" p.210
• "Using the Displayed Keyboard" p.211
• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.212
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu" p.214
• "Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu" p.216
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
• "Projector Network Settings - Network Menu" p.231
• "Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu" p.240
• "Projector Information Display - Info Menu" p.242
• "Projector Reset Options - Reset Menu" p.245
• "Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors (Batch Setup)" p.246
Using the Projector's Menus
210
You can use the projector's menus to adjust the settings that control how your
projector works. The projector displays the menus on the screen.
a
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
You see the menu screen displaying the Image menu settings.
b
Press the up or down arrow buttons to move through the menus listed
on the left. The settings for each menu are displayed on the right.
a
The available settings depend on the current input source.
c
To change settings in the displayed menu, press [Enter].
d
Press the up or down arrow button to move through the settings.
e
Change the settings using the buttons listed on the bottom of the menu
screens.
f
To return all the menu settings to their default values, select Reset.
g
When you finish changing settings on a menu, press [Esc].
h
Press [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Using the Displayed Keyboard
211
You can use the displayed keyboard to enter numbers and characters.
a
Use the arrow buttons on the control panel or remote control to
highlight the number or character you want to enter and press the
[Enter] button.
a
Each time you select the CAPS key, the characters change
between upper case and lower case. Each time you select the
SYM1/2 key, the symbols enclosed by the frame change.
b
After entering the text, select Finish on the keyboard to confirm your
entries. Select Cancel to cancel entering text.
a
You can select projector settings and control projection over a network
using a Web browser from your computer.
Some symbols cannot be entered using the displayed keyboard. Use
your Web browser to enter the text.
gg Related Links
• "Available Text Using the Displayed Keyboard" p.211
• "Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser" p.194
Available Text Using the Displayed Keyboard
You can enter the following text when using the displayed keyboard.
Text type Details
Numbers 0123456789
Alphabet ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY
Z
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
Symbols ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ]
^ _ ` { | } ~
Image Quality Settings - Image Menu
212
Settings on the Image menu let you adjust the quality of your image for the
input source you are currently using. The available settings depend on the
currently selected input source.
To change settings for an input source, make sure the source is connected and
select that source.
Setting Options Description
Color Mode See the list of
available color
modes
Adjusts the vividness of image colors for
various image types and environments.
Brightness Varying levels
available
Lightens or darkens the overall image.
Contrast Varying levels
available
Adjusts the difference between light and
dark areas of the image.
Color Saturation Varying levels
available
Adjusts the intensity of the image colors.
Tint Varying levels
available
Adjusts the balance of green to magenta
tones in the image.
Sharpness Varying levels
available
Adjusts the sharpness or softness of
image details.
Setting Options Description
Color Temp. Sets the color tone based on color
temperature.
Color Temp. Color Temp.: sets the color temperature
according to the color mode you selected.
The image is tinted blue when a high
value is selected and tinted red when a
low value is selected.
Customized Customized: adjusts the individual R
(red), G (green), and B (blue)
components of the offset and gain.
Image
Enhancement
Noise Reduction Reduces flickering in analog images.
Advanced Selects detailed image settings:
Gamma Gamma: adjusts the coloring by selecting
one of the gamma correction values, or
referring to the projected image or a
gamma graph.
RGBCMY RGBCMY: adjusts the hue, saturation,
and brightness of each color R (red), G
(green), B (blue), C (cyan), M (magenta),
Y (yellow) individually.
Deinterlacing
(For interlaced
signal
[480i/576i/1080i]
input)
Deinterlacing: sets whether or not to
convert interlaced-to-progressive signals
for certain video image types.
• Off: for fast-moving video images.
• Video: for most video images.
• Film/Auto: for movies, computer
graphics, and animation.
Auto Iris Off
Normal
High Speed
Adjusts the projected luminance based
on the image brightness.
Available when the Color Mode is set to
Dynamic or Cinema.
This item is disabled when Multi-
Projection is set to On.
s Extended > Multi-Projection >
Multi-Projection
Image Quality Settings - Image Menu
213
Setting Options Description
Reset — Resets all adjustment values except Color
Mode on the Image menu to their
default settings.
a
• The Brightness setting does not affect lamp brightness. To change
the lamp brightness mode, use the Power Consumption setting in
the projector's ECO menu.
gg Related Links
• "Available Color Modes" p.72
Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu
214
Normally the projector automatically detects and optimizes the input signal
settings. If you need to customize the settings, you can use the Signal menu.
The available settings depend on the currently selected input source.
a
You cannot select settings on the Signal menu when the current input
source is one of the following:
• Whiteboard
• USB Display
• USB
• LAN
• Screen Mirroring (EB-1460Ui)
a
You can restore the default settings of the Tracking, Sync., and
Position settings by pressing the [Auto] button on the remote control.
To change settings for an input source, make sure the source is connected and
select that source.
Setting Options Description
Resolution Auto
Wide
Normal
Sets the input signal resolution if not
detected automatically using the Auto
option.
Setting Options Description
Aspect See the list of
available aspect
ratios.
Sets the aspect ratio (width-to-height
ratio) for the selected input source.
Tracking Varying levels
available
Adjusts the signal to eliminate vertical
stripes in computer images.
Sync. Varying levels
available
Adjusts the signal to eliminate fuzziness
or flickering in computer images.
Position — Adjusts the image location on the screen.
Auto Setup On
Off
Automatically optimizes computer image
quality (when On).
Overscan Auto
Off
4%
8%
Changes the projected image ratio to
make the edges visible by a selectable
percentage or automatically.
Advanced HDMI Video
Range
HDMI Video Range: sets the video
range to match the setting of the device
connected to the HDMI port.
• Auto: detects the video range
automatically.
• Normal: normally for images from a
device other than a computer; can also
be selected if the black areas of the
image are too bright.
• Expanded: normally for images from a
computer; can also be selected if the
image is too dark.
Input Signal Input Signal: specifies the signal type
from the input sources connected to the
computer ports.
• Auto: detects signals automatically.
• RGB: inputs computer/RGB video
signals.
• Component: inputs component video
signals.
Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu
215
Setting Options Description
Video Signal Video Signal: specifies the signal type
from the input sources connected to the
video ports. If interference appears or no
image appears when set to Auto, select
the appropriate signal according to the
connected equipment.
Reset — Resets all adjustment values on the
Signal menu to their default settings,
except for the following:
• Input Signal
gg Related Links
• "Available Image Aspect Ratios" p.70
Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu
216
Options on the Settings menu let you customize various projector features.
Setting Options Description
Geometry
Correction
Adjusts image shape to rectangular.
H/V-Keystone H/V-Keystone: select to manually
correct horizontal and vertical sides.
Quick Corner Quick Corner: select to correct image
shape and alignment using an on-screen
display.
Arc Correction Arc Correction: corrects the corners and
sides of an image projected on a curved
surface.
• Load Memory: loads the settings you
made and saved.
• Save Memory: saves the current shape
of an image you have adjusted.
Setting Options Description
Split Screen Screen Size
Source
Swap Screens
Audio Source
Align
Pen Mode
Target Pen Mode
Display Drawing
Area
Display the QR
Code
Exit Split Screen
Divides the viewing area horizontally and
displays two images side-by-side (press
[Esc] to cancel split screen display).
Zoom Varying levels
available
Adjusts the size of the projected image.
Image Shift Varying positions
available
Adjusts the position of the image without
moving the projector.
Volume Varying levels
available
Adjusts the volume of projector’s speaker
system.
Setting values are saved for each source.
HDMI Link Adjusts the HDMI Link options:
Device
Connections
Device Connections: lists the devices
connected to the HDMI ports.
HDMI Link HDMI Link: enables or disables the
HDMI Link features.
Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu
217
Setting Options Description
Power On Link Power On Link: controls what happens
when you turn on the projector or
connected device.
• Bidirectional: automatically turns on
the connected device when you turn on
the projector, and vice versa.
• Device -> PJ: automatically turns on
the projector when you turn on the
connected device.
• PJ -> Device: automatically turns on
the connected device when you turn on
the projector.
Power Off Link Power Off Link: controls whether
connected devices are turned off when
you turn off the projector.
Link Buffer Link Buffer: improves the performance
of the linked operations by changing the
settings if the HDMI Link function is not
working correctly.
Lock Setting Control Panel Lock Controls projector button locking to
secure the projector:
Full Lock: locks all buttons.
Partial Lock: locks all buttons except the
power button.
Off: no buttons locked.
Pointer Shape
Pointer 1:
Pointer 2:
Pointer 3:
Changes the shape of the remote control
pointer.
Remote Receiver Front/Rear
Front
Rear
Off
Limits reception of remote control
signals by the selected receiver; Off turns
off all receivers.
Setting Options Description
User Button Power
Consumption
Info
Deinterlacing
Resolution
Pattern Display
Auto Calibration
Display the QR
Code
Installation Guide
Assigns a menu option to the [User]
button on the remote control for one-
touch access.
Pattern Selects various pattern display options.
Attention
If a pattern is displayed for a
long time, a residual image may
be visible in projected images.
Pattern Display Pattern Display: lets you display the
selected pattern type on the screen to aid
in presentation.
Pattern Type Pattern Type: select from Patterns 1 to 4
or User Pattern. Patterns 1 to 4 display
patterns pre-registered in the projector,
such as ruled lines or grid patterns.
User Pattern User Pattern: captures a projected screen
and saves it as a pattern for display.
Test Pattern Test Pattern: displays a test pattern to
assist in focusing and zooming the image
and correcting image shape (press the
[Esc] button to cancel pattern display).
Installation Guide — Displays a guide screen when installing
the projector.
Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu
218
Setting Options Description
Reset — Resets all adjustment values on the
Settings menu to their default settings,
except for the following:
• Zoom
• Image Shift
• Power On Link
• Power Off Link
• Link Buffer
• User Button
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
219
Settings on the Extended menu let you customize various projector setup
features.
Setting Options Description
Easy Interactive
Function
To Easy Interactive
Function menu
Selects the various projector setup
features when using the interactive
features.
Whiteboard
Settings
To Whiteboard
Settings menu
Sets whiteboard mode.
Home Screen Selects the projector's Home screen
display options:
Home Screen Auto
Disp.
Home Screen Auto Disp.: select whether
or not to display the Home screen
automatically when there is no input
signal when turning on the projector.
Custom Setting L1
Custom Setting L2
Custom Setting L3
Custom Setting R1
Custom Setting R2
Custom Setting R3
Custom Setting L1 to Custom Setting
R3: select to set functions and the display
as the customized Home screen.
Display Selects various display options:
Setting Options Description
Messages Messages: set to On to display messages
such as input source name, color mode
name, aspect ratio, no signal message, or
high temperature warning on your
projected image. Set to Off if you do not
want to display messages.
Display
Background
Display Background: sets the screen
color or logo to display when no signal is
received.
Startup Screen Startup Screen: set to On to display a
logo when the projector starts up.
A/V Mute A/V Mute: sets the screen color or logo
to display when A/V Mute is turned on.
Color Uniformity Color Uniformity: set to On to adjust
the color tone balance for the whole
screen.
• Adjustment Level: set the adjustment
level.
• Start Adjustments: select the area for
which you want to adjust the color
tone for red, green, and blue
individually.
Toolbars Toolbars: select whether or not to always
display the drawing toolbar when using
the interactive features. The default is
Hide for Set Time.
Pen Mode Icon Pen Mode Icon: set to On to display the
icon to change the pen mode when using
the interactive features.
Projector Control Projector Control: set to On to display
the bottom toolbar, annotation mode
tabs, and whiteboard mode tabs when
using the interactive features.
User's Logo — Creates a screen that the projector
displays to identify itself and enhance
security.
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
220
Setting Options Description
Projection Front
Front/Upside
Down
Rear
Rear/Upside Down
Selects the way the projector faces the
screen so the image is oriented correctly.
Operation Selects various operation options:
Direct Power On Direct Power On: lets you turn on the
projector by plugging it in without
pressing the power button.
High Altitude
Mode
High Altitude Mode: regulates the
projector’s operating temperature at
altitudes above 1500 m.
Auto Source Search Auto Source Search: set to On to detect
the input signal automatically and
project images when there is no input
signal.
Auto Power On Auto Power On: select the image source
from which you want to automatically
start projection. When the projector
detects the input signal from the selected
image source, it projects automatically in
standby mode.
Date & Time Date & Time: adjusts the projector's
system time and date settings.
• Daylight Saving Time: set to On to
activate daylight saving time.
• Internet Time: set to On to update the
time automatically through an Internet
time server.
A/V Settings Selects various audio and video output
settings:
A/V Output A/V Output: set to Always On to output
audio and images to external devices
when the projector is in standby mode.
(Set Standby Mode to Communication
On in the projector's ECO menu first.)
Setting Options Description
Audio Output Audio Output: selects the audio input
port when projecting images from
anything except for HDMI ports.
HDMI1 Audio
Output
HDMI2 Audio
Output
HDMI1 Audio Output/HDMI2 Audio
Output: selects the audio input port
when projecting images from HDMI
ports.
DVI Output DVI Output: selects an image source to
display on the DVI monitor connected to
the projector. Select Whiteboard to
display the whiteboard screen. Select
Projected Image to display the currently
projected image source.
HDMI2 Out (Split
Screen)
HDMI2 Out (Split Screen): When
performing split screen projection, and if
you do not want to display images from
the HDMI2 port, select Off.
USB Type B Easy Interactive
Function
Easy Interactive Function: select to set
the interactive features to operate
computers (computer interactive mode).
USB Display and Wireless Mouse
functions are not available.
USB Display/Easy
Interactive
Function
USB Display/Easy Interactive Function:
select to set the interactive features to
operate computers (computer interactive
mode) and USB Display. The Wireless
Mouse function is not available.
Wireless
Mouse/USB
Display
Wireless Mouse/USB Display: select to
use the Wireless Mouse function and
USB Display. You cannot use the
interactive features to operate computers
(computer interactive mode).
Multi-Projection Make settings when projecting from
multiple projectors:
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
221
Setting Options Description
Multi-Projection Multi-Projection: set to On to match the
display quality of multiple projectors.
When set to On, the following are
automatically set to prevent unevenness
on the right and left screens.
s Image > Auto Iris > Off
s ECO > Power Consumption >
Normal
s ECO > Light Optimizer > Off
Projector ID Projector ID: assigns an ID for the
projector when you use multiple
projectors.
Color Mode Color Mode: adjusts the vividness of
image colors for various image types and
environments. When using multiple
projectors, make sure you select the same
color mode for all of the projectors.
Color Uniformity Color Uniformity: adjusts the color tone
balance for the whole screen.
Brightness Level Brightness Level: sets the lamp
brightness level between 1 and 5 when
the brightness of each lamp differs. This
item can be adjusted only when Power
Consumption is set to Normal in the
ECO menu.
Color Matching Color Matching: corrects the difference
between the tint and brightness of each
projected image.
RGBCMY RGBCMY: adjusts the Hue, Saturation,
and Brightness for R (Red), G (Green), B
(Blue), C (Cyan), M (Magenta), and Y
(Yellow) color components.
Reset Reset: resets all adjustment values for the
Multi-Projection menu to their default
settings.
Schedule Settings To Schedule
Settings menu
Schedules projector events to occur
automatically at selected dates and times.
Setting Options Description
Language Various languages
available
Select the language for projector menu
and message displays.
Reset — Resets all adjustment values on the
Extended menu to their default settings,
except for the following:
• Easy Interactive Function
• Toolbars
• Pen Mode Icon
• Projector Control
• User's Logo
• Projection
• High Altitude Mode
• Auto Source Search
• Date & Time
• A/V Output
• DVI Output
• USB Type B
• Multi-Projection
• Projector ID
• Color Mode
• Color Matching
• Schedule Settings
• Language
a
When you set User's Logo Protection to On in the Password
Protection screen, you cannot change settings related to user's logo
display (Display Background, Startup Screen, A/V Mute in the
Display setting). Set User's Logo Protection to Off first.
gg Related Links
• "Extended Menu - Easy Interactive Function Menu" p.222
• "Extended Menu - Whiteboard Settings Menu" p.224
• "Selecting Password Security Types" p.169
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
222
Extended Menu - Easy Interactive Function Menu
Settings on the Easy Interactive Function menu let you customize various
projector setup features when using the interactive features.
gg Related Links
• "General" p.222
• "PC Interactive" p.223
General
Settings on the General section let you set various settings when using the
interactive features.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > General
Setting Options Description
Auto Calibration — Starts calibration for pen operations.
Manual Calibration
Touch Unit Setup * Selects settings for the Touch unit.
Installation Pattern Installation Pattern: displays reference
points to help you determine the
installation position of the Touch Unit.
Setting Options Description
Power Power: turns on the Touch Unit power.
Angle Adjustment Angle Adjustment: performs angle
adjustment for laser diffusion.
Touch Calibration Touch Calibration: performs calibration
for touch operations with your finger.
Pen Mode PC Free
Annotation
PC Interactive
Selects the mode for the interactive pens.
When set to PC Free Annotation, you
can draw on the projected screen. When
set to PC Interactive, you can operate a
computer from the projected screen.
Hovering On
Off
When set to On, the pointer follows the
pen tip as you hover it over the screen
and move it around.
Advanced
(Advanced section)
Distance of
Projectors
Distance of Projectors: select Mode 2. If
the distance between the projectors is
longer than 2 m, or if the interactive pen
operation is unstable in Mode 2, select
Mode 1.
Sync of Projectors Sync of Projectors: if the projectors are
connected using the optional remote
control cable set, select Wired.
Multi-Projection Multi-Projection: selects the position
(right or left) for each projected screen
when you set your projector's interactive
features with two projectors installed side
by side.
Wired Sync Mode Wired Sync Mode: if the projectors are
not connected using the optional remote
cable set, or if the interactive pen
operation is unstable in Mode 1, select
Mode 2.
Preset Pen
Thickness
Preset Pen Thickness: selects Normal or
Thin as the line thickness from thin
width or thick width.
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
223
Setting Options Description
Eraser Size Eraser Size: selects Normal or Large as
the erasable area from thin width or
thick width.
Color Palette Color Palette: allows you to select
Palette 2 if certain colors in the default
color palette are difficult to see.
Advanced (PC Free
Annotation
section)
Pen Button
Function
Pen Button Function: sets the function
of the button on the side of the
interactive pen in annotation mode.
Default Touch
Action
Default Touch Action: allows you to
select whether to activate Eraser or PC
Interactive when you switch to
annotation mode.
Confirm Clear
Screen
Confirm Clear Screen: when set to On, a
confirmation screen is displayed before
clearing all the content drawn on the
projected screen.
* Available only for EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui.
PC Interactive
Settings on the PC Interactive section let you set various settings when you
want to operate a computer from the projected screen.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > PC Interactive
Setting Options Description
Pen Operation
Mode
Selects the operation mode for interactive
pen or your finger according to the
operating system on your computer.
Windows/Mac
Mode
Windows/Mac Mode: when using
Windows or Mac.
Ubuntu Mode Ubuntu Mode: when using Ubuntu.
When selecting this mode, you cannot
use the Windows' ink functionality using
the interactive pen.
Enable Right Click On
Off
When set to On, a long press by the pen
tip or finger acts as a right-click
operation.
(Only available when Pen Operation
Mode is set to Ubuntu Mode.)
Advanced Pen Tip Button Pen Tip Button: assigns either Right
Click or Left Click to the pen tip.
(Only available when Pen Operation
Mode is set to Ubuntu Mode.)
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
224
Setting Options Description
Auto Adjust Pen
Area
Auto Adjust Pen Area: when set to On,
the pen area is automatically adjusted as
the resolution for the connected
computer changes. Set to Off if you do
not want to automatically adjust the pen
area that has been manually adjusted.
Manual Adj. Pen
Area
Manual Adj. Pen Area: adjusts the pen
area manually.
gg Related Links
• "Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model" p.40
Extended Menu - Whiteboard Settings Menu
Settings on the Whiteboard Settings menu let you customize various settings
when using whiteboard mode.
a
When you set Whiteboard Protection to On in the Password
Protection screen, you cannot change settings on the Whiteboard
Settings menu. Set Whiteboard Protection to Off.
gg Related Links
• "Whiteboard Settings Menu - Basic Menu" p.224
• "Whiteboard Settings Menu - Policy Menu" p.225
• "Whiteboard Settings Menu - Print Menu" p.226
• "Whiteboard Settings Menu - Save Menu" p.227
• "Whiteboard Settings Menu - Mail Menu" p.227
• "Whiteboard Settings Menu - Directory Menu" p.228
• "Whiteboard Settings Menu - Reset Menu" p.230
Whiteboard Settings Menu - Basic Menu
Settings on the Basic menu let you select the basic whiteboard mode settings.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings > Basic
Setting Options Description
Interactive Settings Selects interactive settings for whiteboard
mode.
Pen Button
Function
Pen Button Function: sets the function
of the button on the side of the
interactive pen in whiteboard mode.
Default Touch
Action
Default Touch Action: allows you to
select whether to activate Eraser or
Selection Tool when you switch to
whiteboard mode.
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
225
Setting Options Description
Split Screen Setup Display Area Sets the displayed area of the whiteboard
screen when you split the screen using
the annotation mode or whiteboard
mode tabs.
From Left: displays the left side of the
whiteboard screen when you split the
screen from the right or left side.
From Right: displays the right side of the
whiteboard screen when you split the
screen from the right or left side.
No Adjustments: displays the right side
of the whiteboard screen when you split
the screen from the right side, and the
left side of the whiteboard screen when
you split the screen from the left side.
Clock Display
Settings
Display Format
Date
Time
Sets the date and time display on the
whiteboard mode bottom toolbar. Set the
date and time in Date & Time in the
projector's Extended menu.
s Extended > Operation > Date &
Time
Keyboard Settings Keyboard Layout Selects the displayed keyboard layout.
Whiteboard Settings Menu - Policy Menu
Settings on the Policy menu let you select the policy settings.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings > Policy
Setting Options Description
Policy Setting Capture
Print
Scan
USB Storage
PC via USB Cable
Network Folder
Mail
Shared Whiteboard
Enables or disables features. All features
are enabled by default.
Template Settings Protect User
Templates
When set to On, the user templates can
only be changed through the Web
browser interface. When set to Off, you
can set the user templates in whiteboard
mode or from a Web browser.
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
226
Setting Options Description
Internal Storage Auto Delete Saved
Data
Auto Delete Saved Data: selects whether
or not to delete the current drawing
contents on the whiteboard when
turning off the projector.
Select Clear to delete the drawing
contents on the whiteboard.
Select Retain to save the drawing
contents on the whiteboard.
Delete All Internal
Data
Delete All Internal Data: Select Execute
to delete the internal storage data.
Whiteboard Settings Menu - Print Menu
Settings on the Print menu let you select the print settings.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings > Print
Setting Options Description
Default Printer USB
Network
Sets the default printer used when
printing. The selected printer is displayed
as the default in whiteboard mode and is
used automatically in annotation mode.
Print Function Selects printing options.
Quality Quality: sets the default print quality.
Paper Size Paper Size: sets the default paper size.
(A4, A3, or Letter)
Scan Function Rotate After
Scanning
Rotates the scanned image to project in
the same orientation as when scanning
when set to On.
(Only available when scanning from the
document table.)
Network Printer
Settings
Configures your network printer.
IP Address IP Address: enter the IP address for the
network printer, using 0 to 255 for each
address field. You cannot use the
following IP addresses: 127.x.x.x,
192.0.2.x, or 224.0.0.0 through
255.255.255.255 (where x is a number
from 0 to 255). To return the IP address
to its default value, enter 0.0.0.0.
Printer Type Printer Type: sets the type of connected
printer. In most cases, you should leave
this as Auto Detect. If printing fails
when using a PCL6 printer in the Auto
Detect mode, try changing to PCL6
Mode1 or PCL6 Mode2. You may not be
able to print correctly if this setting does
not match the printer type and settings
of the connected network printer.
Job username Job username: sets the user name for
print jobs. Projector name is set as
default. You can enter up to 31
alphanumeric characters (you cannot
use : and spaces).
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
227
Setting Options Description
Test Print Test Print: prints a test page.
Whiteboard Settings Menu - Save Menu
Settings on the Save menu let you select the save settings.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings > Save
Setting Options Description
Default Save
Location
USB
Network
Sets the default save location for drawing
data. The selected location is displayed as
the default in whiteboard mode and is
used automatically in annotation mode.
Always apply
password
On
Off
Set to On to always set a password on a
file. When set to On, you can save files
only in whiteboard mode and as a PDF
or EWF format.
Network Folder
Settings
Sets the network folder.
Setting Options Description
CIFS Server CIFS Server: enter the IP address or
FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name)
for the CIFS server. You can enter up to
63 alphanumeric characters (you cannot
use " * + , : ; < = > ? [ \ ] ` | and spaces).
You cannot use the following IP
addresses: 127.x.x.x, 192.9.2.x, or
224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255
(where x is a number from 0 to 255). If
you specify an FQDN, you must
configure a DNS server.
Shared Folder Path Shared Folder Path: sets the network
folder name in "share name\folder name"
or "share name". You can enter up to 63
alphanumeric characters (you cannot use
" * / : < > ? and |).
User name User name: enter a user name that will
have read/write privileges on the network
folder. You can enter up to 64
alphanumeric characters (you cannot
use : and spaces). You can enter a
domain name by adding it before the
user name and separating them with a
backslash (domain\username).
Password Password: enter a password for the user
name. You can enter up to 64
alphanumeric characters (you cannot
use : and spaces). After you enter the
password and select Setup complete, the
password is displayed as an asterisk (*).
Check Connection Check Connection: tests the network
connection.
Whiteboard Settings Menu - Mail Menu
Settings on the Mail menu let you select the email settings.
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
228
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings > Mail
Setting Options Description
From Up to 64
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use " ( ) , : ;
< > [ \ ] : spaces)
Enter the email address to be displayed
to the sender.
Default e-mail
address
Up to 64
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use " ( ) , : ;
< > [ \ ] : spaces)
Enter the default email address used to
send emails. You can also specify the
domain name following an at mark to aid
email address input; for example,
"@xxx.co.jp".
Disallow Address
Input
On
Off
Set to On to choose e-mail addresses
only from an address book or directory
service.
Mail Server Configures your mail server.
Setting Options Description
SMTP Server SMTP Server: enter the IP address or
FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name)
for the mail server. You can enter up to
63 alphanumeric characters (you cannot
use " * + , : ; < = > ? [ \ ] ` | and spaces).
You cannot use the following IP
addresses: 127.x.x.x, 192.0.2.x, or
224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255
(where x is a number from 0 to 255). If
you specify an FQDN, you must
configure a DNS server.
Authentication Authentication: sets the type of
authentication expected by the mail
server.
Port Number Port Number: The default port varies
depending on the Authentication
setting: 25 for Open, 465 for SSL, and
587 for TLS.
User name User name: enter a user name for the
mail server. You can enter up to 64
alphanumeric characters (you cannot
use : and spaces).
Password Password: enter a password for the mail
server. You can enter up to 64
alphanumeric characters (you cannot
use : and spaces).
Send a test e-mail Send a test e-mail: connects to the
SMTP server and sends a test email to
the address you set as the default.
Whiteboard Settings Menu - Directory Menu
Settings on the Directory menu let you select the directory service settings.
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
229
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings > Directory
Setting Options Description
Enable Directory
Access
On
Off
Set to On to search for user names and
email addresses from a directory service.
Search Base DN Up to 63
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use : and
spaces)
Specify the DN (Distinguished Name)
where the search for user names and
email addresses should start. Make sure
you specify all OU (Organizational Unit)
and DC (Domain Component) as
necessary in the order of OU then DC;
for example,
"OU=accounts,DC=example,DC=com".
The DN must be at or below the DC level
in the database structure.
Search target
attributes
Up to 63
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use : and
spaces)
Specify the search key for user name,
email address, and user group name. The
default value is "cn". You can specify up
to three keys separated by comma(s). Do
not use three or more commas, commas
right at the start or the end, and
continuous commas. The search is
performed using forward matching.
Setting Options Description
User Attributes Up to 63
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use : and
spaces)
Specify the attribute for user name; for
example, "cn".
Mail Attributes Up to 63
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use : and
spaces)
Specify the attribute for mail address; for
example, "mail".
Group Attributes Up to 63
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use : and
spaces)
Specify the attribute for a user group
name.
Additional filter Up to 63
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use : and
spaces)
Specify an additional search filter to
Search target attributes.
Directory Server
Settings
Configures your directory server.
LDAP Server LDAP Server: enter the IP address or
FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name)
for the LDAP server. You can enter up to
63 alphanumeric characters (you cannot
use " * + , : ; < = > ? [ \ ] ` | and spaces).
You cannot use the following IP
addresses: 127.x.x.x, 192.9.2.x, or
224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255
(where x is a number from 0 to 255). If
you specify an FQDN, you must
configure a DNS server.
Port Number Port Number: enter a port number for
the LDAP server. The default port is 389.
Specify "3268" to search the global
catalog.
Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu
230
Setting Options Description
Authentication Authentication: sets the type of
authentication expected by the LDAP
server. If you want to select Digest-MD5
or Simple as an authentication method
when an IP address is set for LDAP
Server, you must configure the DNS
server to enable reverse DNS lookup.
User name User name: enter a user name for the
LDAP server. You can enter up to 64
alphanumeric characters (you cannot
use : and spaces). Use one of the
following methods when entering the
user name with the domain name:
• "domain name\user name"
• "user name@domain name"
Password Password: enter a password for the
LDAP server. You can enter up to 64
alphanumeric characters (you cannot
use : and spaces).
Check Connection Check Connection: tests the network
connection.
Whiteboard Settings Menu - Reset Menu
Settings on the Reset menu let you return all of the Whiteboard Settings
menu items to the default settings.
s Extended > Whiteboard Settings > Reset
The following data saved in the internal storage is deleted.
• Template information
• Address book
• Shared whiteboard connection logs
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
231
Settings on the Network menu let you view network information and set up
the projector for controlling over a network.
When you set Network Protection to On in the Password Protection screen,
you cannot change the network settings. Set Network Protection to Off first.
Setting Options Description
Screen Mirroring * On
Off
Configures your Screen Mirroring
settings.
Select On to project with the Screen
Mirroring features.
Screen Mirroring
Info *
Display Name
MAC Address
Region Code
Channel
Connected Device
Displays Screen Mirroring status and
details.
Available when you have set Screen
Mirroring to On.
Screen Mirroring
Settings *
To Screen
Mirroring Settings
menu
Configures your Screen Mirroring
settings.
Setting Options Description
Wireless LAN
Power
On
Off
Configures your wireless LAN settings.
Select On to project images via a wireless
LAN. If you do not want to connect via
wireless LAN, turn it off to prevent
unauthorized access by others.
Net. Info. -
Wireless LAN
Connection Mode
Wireless LAN Sys.
Antenna Level
Projector Name
SSID
DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
MAC Address
Region Code
Displays wireless network status and
details.
Net. Info. - Wired
LAN
Projector Name
DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
MAC Address
Displays wired network status and
details.
Display the QR
Code
— Displays a QR code for connecting with
iOS or Android devices using the Epson
iProjection app.
Remote Desktop
Setup
Configures settings for remote desktop
connection.
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
232
Setting Options Description
Address Address: enter the remote computer's IP
address or FQDN (Fully Qualified
Domain Name) for the remote desktop
connection. You can enter up to 32
alphanumeric characters. To input more
than 32 characters, use your Web
browser. If you specify an FQDN, you
must configure a DNS server. You can
enter a port number by adding it after
the IP address or FQDN and separating
them with a colon (IP address or
FQDN:port number).
User name User name: enter a user name for the
remote computer. You can enter up to 32
alphanumeric characters. You can enter a
domain name by adding it before the
user name and separating them with a
backslash (domain\username).
Password Password: enter a password for the
remote computer. You can enter up to 32
alphanumeric characters.
Network
Configuration
To additional
network menus
Configures your network settings.
* Available only for EB‑1460Ui.
a
Once you have connected your projector to your network, you can
select projector settings and control projection using a compatible Web
browser. This allows you to access the projector remotely.
gg Related Links
• "Network Menu - Screen Mirroring Settings" p.232
• "Network Menu - Basic Menu" p.233
• "Network Menu - Wireless LAN Menu" p.234
• "Network Menu - Wired LAN Menu" p.236
• "Network Menu - Notifications Menu" p.237
• "Network Menu - Others Menu" p.238
• "Network Menu - Reset Menu" p.239
• "Selecting Password Security Types" p.169
Network Menu - Screen Mirroring Settings
Settings on the Screen Mirroring Settings menu let you select the Screen
Mirroring settings (EB-1460Ui).
s Network > Screen Mirroring Settings
Setting Options Description
Display Name Up to 32
alphanumeric
characters
Enter a name to identify the projector
when searching for the projector using
the screen mirroring feature.
Operation Mode Basic
Extended
Select Extended to connect with
advanced options.
Basic Wireless LAN Sys. Sets the communication method between
the projector and the mobile device.
Adjust Image
Quality
Adjusts the screen mirroring
speed/quality.
When you want to increase image
quality, select a small number. When you
want to increase processing speed, select
a large number.
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
233
Setting Options Description
Connection Mode Selects the type of WPS (Wi-Fi Protected
Setup) when you connect to the network
wirelessly. Select PIN to improve the
connection security. If your mobile
device supports only the PBC
connection, select PIN/PBC.
Available when you have set Operation
Mode to Basic.
Extended Available when you have set Operation
Mode to Extended.
Meeting Mode Selects the type of meeting.
• Interruptions OK: lets you connect to
another mobile device during Screen
Mirroring projection.
• No Interruptions: lets you exclusively
connect to one device.
Channel Selects the wireless channel used by
Screen Mirroring.
Display Display PIN Code Set to On to display the eight-digit PIN
code on the projected image when
projecting input sources other than
Screen Mirroring.
Display Device
Name
Set to On to display the newly connected
device name on the projected image
when projecting input sources other than
Screen Mirroring.
Reset — Resets all adjustment values on the
Screen Mirroring Settings menu to their
default settings.
Network Menu - Basic Menu
Settings on the Basic menu let you select the basic network settings.
s Network > Network Configuration > Basic
Setting Options Description
Projector Name Up to 16
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use " * + ,
/ : ; < = > ? [ \ ] ` |
spaces)
Enter a name to identify the projector
over the network.
PJLink Password Up to 32
alphanumeric
characters
Enter a password for using the PJLink
protocol for projector control.
Remote Password Up to 8
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use * :
spaces)
Enter a password for accessing the
projector using the Web Remote. (User
name is EPSONREMOTE; default
password is guest.)
Web Control
Password
Up to 8
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use * :
spaces)
Enter a password for accessing the
projector over the Web. (User name is
EPSONWEB; default password is
admin.)
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
234
Setting Options Description
Moderator
Password
Four-digit number Enter a password for accessing the
projector as a moderator using Epson
iProjection. (No password is set by
default.)
Projector Keyword On
Off
Set to On to enable a security password
to prevent access to the projector by
anyone not in the same room as the
projector. You must enter the random
keyword displayed from a computer
using Epson iProjection to access the
projector and share the current screen.
Display LAN Info. Text & QR Code
Text
Set the display format for the projector's
network information.
By simply reading the QR code with
Epson iProjection, you can connect the
mobile device to the projector through a
network. The default value is Text & QR
Code.
Network Menu - Wireless LAN Menu
Settings on the Wireless LAN menu let you select the wireless LAN settings.
s Network > Network Configuration > Wireless LAN
Setting Options Description
Connection Mode Select the type of wireless connection:
Quick Quick: lets you connect to multiple
smartphones, tablets, or computers
directly using wireless communication.
When you select Quick connection
mode, the projector acts as an easy access
point. (We recommend limiting the
number of devices to six or less to
maintain the projection performance.)
Advanced Advanced: lets you connect to multiple
smartphones, tablets, or computers over
a wireless network access point.
Search Access Point To Search View Search for available wireless network
access points in Advanced connection
mode. Depending on the access point
settings, they may not be displayed in the
list.
SSID Up to 32
alphanumeric
characters
Sets the SSID (network name) of the
wireless LAN system the projector is
connecting to.
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
235
Setting Options Description
Security Selects the type of security used on the
wireless network.
When setting security, follow the
instructions from the administrator of
the network system you want to connect
to.
Open Open: security is not set.
WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK: communication is
performed using WPA2 security. Uses
AES method for encryption. When
establishing a connection from a
computer to the projector, enter the
value set in the passphrase.
WPA/WPA2-PSK WPA/WPA2-PSK: connects in WPA
personal mode. Encryption method is
selected automatically according to the
access point settings. Set a passphrase
which is the same for the access point.
WPA2-EAP WPA2-EAP: communication is
performed using WPA2 security. Uses
AES method for encryption.
WPA/WPA2-EAP WPA/WPA2-EAP: connects in WPA
enterprise mode. The encryption method
is selected automatically according to the
access point settings.
Passphrase Various
passphrases from 8
to 32 characters
(when entering
from a Web
browser: various
passphrases from 8
to 63 characters)
For WPA2-PSK and WPA/WPA2-PSK
security, selects the pre-shared
passphrase used on the network.
When the passphrase is entered and the
[Enter] button is pressed, the value is set
and displayed as an asterisk (*).
We recommend changing the passphrase
periodically for security. If the network
settings are initialized, it returns to the
initial passphrase.
EAP Method Set the EAP settings for WPA2-EAP and
WPA/WPA2-EAP security.
Setting Options Description
EAP Type EAP Type: selects the protocol for
authentication.
• PEAP: authentication protocol widely
used in Windows Server.
• PEAP-TLS: authentication protocol
used in Windows Server. Select this
when using a client certificate.
• EAP-TLS: authentication protocol
widely used to use a client certificate.
• EAP-FAST, LEAP: select this when
these authentication protocols are
used.
User name User name: enter up to 64 alphanumeric
characters. You can enter up to 32
alphanumeric characters in the projector
menu. To enter more than 32 characters,
use your Web browser. You can enter a
domain name by adding it before the
user name and separating them with a
backslash (domain\username).
When importing a client certificate, the
name the certificate was issued to is
automatically set.
Password Password: enter a password up to 64
alphanumeric characters for
authentication when using the PEAP,
EAP-FAST, or LEAP type. You can enter
up to 32 alphanumeric characters in the
projector menu. To enter more than 32
characters, use your Web browser. After
you enter the password and select Finish,
the password is displayed as an asterisk
(*).
Client Certificate Client Certificate: imports the client
certificate when using the PEAP-TLS or
EAP-TLS type.
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
236
Setting Options Description
Verify Server Cert. Verify Server Cert.: selects whether to
verify the server certificate when a CA
certificate has been set.
CA certificate CA certificate: imports the CA certificate
when using the PEAP, PEAP-TLS, EAP-
TLS, or EAP-FAST type.
RADIUS Server
Name
RADIUS Server Name: enter the server
name to verify. You can enter up to 32
alphanumeric characters.
Channel 1ch
6ch
11ch
In Quick connection mode, selects the
frequency band (channel) used by the
wireless LAN.
IP Settings DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
DHCP: set to On if your network assigns
addresses automatically; set to Off to
manually enter the network's IP
Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway
Address using 0 to 255 for each address
field.
Do not use these addresses: 0.0.0.0,
127.x.x.x, 192.0.2.x or 224.0.0.0 through
255.255.255.255 (where x is a number
from 0 to 255) for IP Address,
255.255.255.255 or 0.0.0.0 through
254.255.255.255 for Subnet Mask, and
0.0.0.0, 127.x.x.x or 224.0.0.0 through
255.255.255.255 for Gateway Address.
DNS Server 1
DNS Server 2
DNS Server 1/DNS Server 2: enter the
IP address for the DNS server, using 0 to
255 for each address field. The DNS
server resolves the host name. You
cannot use the following IP addresses:
127.x.x.x (where x is a number from 0 to
255). When these settings are not set,
DNS server information is acquired
using DHCP.
SSID Display On
Off
Select whether to display the SSID on the
network standby screen and Home
screen.
Setting Options Description
IP Address Display On
Off
Select whether to display the IP address
on the network standby screen and
Home screen.
Network Menu - Wired LAN Menu
Settings on the Wired LAN menu let you select the wired LAN settings.
s Network > Network Configuration > Wired LAN
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
237
Setting Options Description
IP Settings DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
DHCP: set to On if your network assigns
addresses automatically; set to Off to
manually enter the network's IP
Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway
Address using 0 to 255 for each address
field.
Do not use these addresses: 0.0.0.0,
127.x.x.x, 192.0.2.x or 224.0.0.0 through
255.255.255.255 (where x is a number
from 0 to 255) for IP Address,
255.255.255.255 or 0.0.0.0 through
254.255.255.255 for Subnet Mask, and
0.0.0.0, 127.x.x.x or 224.0.0.0 through
255.255.255.255 for Gateway Address.
DNS Server 1
DNS Server 2
DNS Server 1/DNS Server 2: enter the
IP address for the DNS server, using 0 to
255 for each address field. The DNS
server resolves the host name. You
cannot use the following IP addresses:
127.x.x.x (where x is a number from 0 to
255). When these settings are not set,
DNS server information is acquired
using DHCP.
IP Address Display On
Off
Select whether to display the IP address
on the network standby screen.
Network Menu - Notifications Menu
Settings on the Notifications menu let you receive an email notification if a
problem or warning occurs in the projector.
s Network > Network Configuration > Notifications
Setting Options Description
Mail Notification On
Off
Set to On to send an email to the preset
addresses when a problem or warning
occurs with a projector.
SMTP Server IP address Enter the IP address for the projector's
SMTP server using 0 to 255 for each
address field.
Do not use these addresses: 127.x.x.x,
192.0.2.x or 224.0.0.0 through
255.255.255.255 (where x is a number
from 0 to 255).
Port Number 0 to 65535 (default
is 25)
Select a number for the SMTP server
Port Number.
From Up to 32
alphanumeric
characters
Up to 64
alphanumeric
characters from the
Web browser
(do not use " ( ) , : ;
< > [ \] spaces)
Enter the email address of the sender.
Address 1 Setting
Address 2 Setting
Address 3 Setting
Enter the e-mail address, and select the
alerts you want to receive. Repeat for up
to 3 addresses.
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
238
Setting Options Description
SNMP On
Off
Set to On to monitor the projector using
SNMP. To monitor the projector, you
need to install the SNMP manager
program on your computer. SNMP
should be managed by a network
administrator.
Trap IP Address 1
Trap IP Address 2
IP address Enter up to two IP addresses to receive
SNMP notifications, using 0 to 255 for
each address field.
Do not use these addresses: 127.x.x.x or
224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255
(where x is a number from 0 to 255).
Community Name Up to 32
alphanumeric
characters
(do not use spaces
and any symbols
other than @)
Set the SNMP community name.
PJLink Notification On
Off
Enables or disables the PJLink
notification function.
Notified IP Address IP address Enter the IP address to receive the
projector's operating status when the
PJLink notification function is enabled.
Enter the addresses using 0 to 255 for
each address field.
Do not use these addresses: 127.x.x.x or
224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255
(where x is a number from 0 to 255).
Network Menu - Others Menu
Settings on the Others menu let you select other network settings.
s Network > Network Configuration > Others
Setting Options Description
Secure HTTP On
Off
To strengthen security, communication
between the projector and computer in
Web control is encrypted. When setting
security with Web control, it is
recommended to set this to On.
Web Server Cert. — Imports the Web server certificate for
secure HTTP.
Priority Gateway Wired LAN
Wireless LAN
You can set the priority gateway.
AMX Device
Discovery
On
Off
Set to On when you want to allow the
projector to be detected by AMX Device
Discovery.
Crestron
RoomView
On
Off
Set to On only when monitoring or
controlling the projector over the
network using Crestron RoomView.
Enabling Crestron RoomView disables
the Epson Message Broadcasting feature
in the Epson Projector Management
software.
Projector Network Settings - Network Menu
239
Setting Options Description
Control4 SDDP On
Off
Set to On to allow device information to
be acquired using Control4 Simple
Device Discovery Protocol (SDDP).
Message
Broadcasting
On
Off
Set to On to receive the message
delivered by Epson Projector
Management. See the Epson Projector
Management Operation Guide for details.
Network Menu - Reset Menu
Settings on the Reset menu let you reset all of the network settings.
s Network > Network Configuration > Reset
Setting Options Description
Reset network
settings.
Yes
No
Select Yes to reset all network settings.
Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu
240
Settings on the ECO menu let you customize projector functions to save
power.
When you select a power-saving setting, a leaf icon appears next to the menu
item.
Setting Options Description
Power
Consumption
Selects the brightness mode of the
projector lamp. You cannot select
settings when you use your projector at
high altitude or in locations subject to
high temperatures.
This item is disabled when Multi-
Projection is set to On.
s Extended > Multi-Projection >
Multi-Projection
Auto Auto: sets the projector to sense the
optimum lamp brightness needed and
adjusts the lamp's brightness accordingly.
This item is enabled only when you
install the projector upside-down.
Normal Normal: sets maximum lamp brightness.
Setting Options Description
ECO ECO: reduces lamp brightness and fan
noise, and saves power and lamp life.
Light Optimizer On
Off
When set to On, the lamp brightness is
adjusted according to the projected
image. This helps to reduce the power
consumption by lowering the lamp
brightness according to the scene being
projected.
The setting is stored for each Color
Mode.
This item is enabled when:
• Power Consumption is set to Normal
or Auto.
• Auto Iris is set to Off.
s Image > Auto Iris
• Multi-Projection is set to Off.
s Extended > Multi-Projection >
Multi-Projection
Sleep Mode On
Off
Automatically turns off the projector
after an interval of inactivity (when On).
Sleep Mode Timer 1 to 30 minutes Sets the interval for Sleep Mode.
A/V Mute Timer On
Off
Automatically turns off the projector
after 30 minutes if A/V Mute is enabled
(when On).
Standby Mode Communication
On
Communication
Off
Communication On indicates that the
projector can be monitored over a
network when the projector is in standby
mode. Enable this setting to allow the
following operations to occur when the
projector is in standby mode:
• Monitor and control the projector over
a network
• Output audio and images to an
external device (only when A/V
Output is set to Always On)
s Extended > A/V Settings > A/V
Output
Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu
241
Setting Options Description
ECO Display On
Off
Displays a leaf icon in the bottom left
corner of the projected screen to indicate
the power-saving status when the lamp
brightness changes (when On).
Reset — Resets all adjustment values on the ECO
menu to their default settings, except for
Standby Mode.
a
• When the Sleep Mode Timer setting is enabled, the lamp dims for a
short time before the timer limit is reached and the projector turns
off.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
Projector Information Display - Info Menu
242
You can display information about the projector and version by viewing the
Info menu. However, you cannot change any settings in the menu.
Information item Description
Projector Info Displays the projector information.
Version Displays the projector's firmware version.
gg Related Links
• "Info Menu - Projector Info Menu" p.242
Info Menu - Projector Info Menu
You can display information about the projector and input sources by viewing
the Projector Info menu in the projector's Info menu.
a
The available settings depend on the current input source.
The lamp usage timer does not register any hours until you have used
the lamp for at least 10 hours.
Information item Description
Lamp Hours Displays the number of hours (H) the lamp has been
used in Normal and ECO Power Consumption modes;
if the information is displayed in yellow, obtain a
genuine Epson replacement lamp soon.
Source Displays the name of the port to which the current
input source is connected.
Input Signal Displays the input signal setting of the current input
source.
Resolution Displays the resolution of the current input source.
Projector Information Display - Info Menu
243
Information item Description
Video Signal Displays the video signal format of the current input
source.
Refresh Rate Displays the refresh rate of the current input source.
Sync Info Displays information that may be needed by a service
technician.
Status Displays information about projector problems that
may be needed by a service technician.
Serial Number Displays the projector's serial number.
Event ID Displays the Event ID number corresponding to a
network problem; see the list of Event ID codes.
gg Related Links
• "Event ID Code List" p.243
Event ID Code List
If the Event ID option on the Projector Info menu displays a code number,
check this list of Event ID codes for the solution to the projector problem
associated with the code.
If you cannot resolve the problem, contact your network administrator or
Epson for technical support.
Event ID
code
Cause and solution
0020
0026
0032
0036
0037
A screen mirroring communication error has occurred. Turn the
projector off and then on again, or restart the network software.
0021 Failed to startup Screen Mirroring. Turn the projector off and then
on again.
Event ID
code
Cause and solution
0022
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0035
Unstable screen mirroring communication. Check the network
communication status, wait a few moments, and try connecting to
the network again.
0023
0024
0025
Connection failed. If you see the PIN entry screen on your
computer, enter the PIN code displayed on the Screen Mirroring
standby screen or at the bottom right of the projected image. If this
does not solve the problem, restart the projector and the connected
devices, and then check the connection settings.
0038
0042
Wireless LAN system mismatch. Check the wireless LAN system for
the mobile device and the projector, and then reconnect.
0041 Connection failed. Delete the recorded projector information on
your computer and try connecting again.
0043 The video format is not supported. Change the resolution of the
mobile device, and then reconnect. Or change the Adjust Image
Quality setting for the projector, and then reconnect.
0432
0435
The network software did not start. Turn the projector off and then
on again.
0433 Cannot display the transferred images. Restart the network software.
0434
0481
0482
0485
Unstable network communication. Check the network
communication status, wait a few moments, and try connecting to
the network again.
0483
04FE
The network software quit unexpectedly. Check the network
communication status, then turn the projector off and then on again.
0484 Communication with computer was disconnected. Restart the
network software.
0479
04FF
A projector system error has occurred. Turn the projector off and
then on again.
Projector Information Display - Info Menu
244
Event ID
code
Cause and solution
0891 Cannot find an access point with the same SSID. Set your computer,
access point, and projector to the same SSID.
0892 The WPA/WPA2 authentication type does not match. Make sure the
wireless network security settings are correct.
0893 The WEP/TKIP/AES encryption type does not match. Make sure the
wireless network security settings are correct.
0894 Communication with an unauthorized access point was
disconnected. Contact your network administrator.
0898 Failed to acquire DHCP. Make sure the DHCP server is operating
correctly. If you are not using DHCP, set the DHCP setting to Off in
the projector's Network menu.
s Network > Network Configuration > Wireless LAN > IP
Settings > DHCP
s Network > Network Configuration > Wired LAN > IP Settings
> DHCP
0899 Other communication errors.
089A The EAP authentication type does not match the network. Check the
wireless LAN security settings and make sure that the security
certificate is installed correctly.
089B EAP server authentication failed. Check the wireless LAN security
settings and make sure that the security certificate is installed
correctly.
089C EAP client authentication failed. Check the wireless LAN security
settings and make sure that the security certificate is installed
correctly.
089D Key exchange failed. Check the wireless LAN security settings and
make sure that the security certificate is installed correctly.
0920 The internal battery that saves the projector's date and time settings
is running low. Contact Epson for help.
Event ID
code
Cause and solution
0B01 The internal storage could not be detected correctly. Turn off the
projector and disconnect the power cord, then reconnect the power
cord and turn the projector back on. The internal storage is
recovered when the projector is turned on and all of the Whiteboard
Settings menu items are returned to the default settings. The
template information, address book, and shared whiteboard
connection logs saved in the internal storage are deleted. If that does
not solve the problem, contact Epson for help.
0BFF An error has occurred in the whiteboard function. Restart the
projector.
Projector Reset Options - Reset Menu
245
You can reset most of the projector settings to their default values using the
Reset All option on the Reset menu.
You can also reset the projector's lamp usage timer to zero when you replace
the lamp using the Reset Lamp Hours option.
You cannot reset the following settings using the Reset All option:
• Input Signal
• Zoom
• Image Shift
• User's Logo
• Color Uniformity
• Color Matching
• Schedule Settings
• Language
• Date & Time
• Network menu items
• Lamp Hours
• Password
Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors (Batch Setup)
246
After selecting the projector's menu settings for one projector, you can use the
following methods to copy the settings to other projectors, as long as they are
the same model.
• by using a USB flash drive
• by using EasyMP Network Updater
Menu settings such as the following are not copied to the other projector.
• Network menu settings (except for the Notifications menu and the Others
menu)
• Lamp Hours and Status from the Projector Info menu
a
Perform batch setup before adjusting the image settings such as
Keystone. Since image adjustment values are also copied to another
projector, the adjustments you made before performing the batch setup
are overwritten and the projected screen you adjusted may change.
When copying the menu settings from one projector to another, user's
logo is also copied. Do not register the information that you do not
want to share between multiple projectors as a user's logo.
Caution
Epson takes no responsibility for batch setup failures and associated repair costs
due to power outages, communication errors, or other problems that may cause
such failures.
gg Related Links
• "Transferring Settings From a USB Flash Drive" p.246
Transferring Settings From a USB Flash Drive
You can copy menu settings from one projector to another of the same model
using a USB flash drive.
a
The USB flash drive must use a FAT format and not incorporate any
security function. Delete any files on the drive before using it for batch
setup or the settings may not be saved correctly.
a
Disconnect the power cord from the projector, and check that all of the
projector's indicators have turned off.
b
Connect an empty USB flash drive directly to the projector's USB-A
port.
c
Hold down the [Esc] button on the remote control or the control panel
and connect the power cord to the projector.
d
When all of the projector's indicators turn on, release the [Esc] button.
The indicators start flashing and the batch setup file is written to the
USB flash drive. When writing is finished, the projector turns off.
Caution
Do not disconnect the power cord or the USB flash drive from the projector
while the file is being written. If the power cord or USB flash drive is
disconnected, the projector may not start correctly.
e
Remove the USB flash drive.
a
The file name for the batch setup file is PJCONFDATA.bin. If
you need to change the file name, add text after PJCONFDATA
using only alphanumeric characters. If you change the
PJCONFDATA section of the file name, the projector may not be
able to recognize the file correctly.
f
Disconnect the power cord from the projector to which you want to
copy settings, and check that all of the projector's indicators have
turned off.
Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors (Batch Setup)
247
g
Connect the USB flash drive containing the saved batch setup file to the
projector's USB-A port.
h
Hold down the [Menu] button on the remote control or the control
panel and connect the power cord to the projector.
i
When all of the projector's indicators turn on, release the [Menu]
button. (The indicators remain on for approximately 75 seconds.)
When all of the indicators start flashing, the settings are being written.
When writing is finished, the projector turns off.
Caution
Do not disconnect the power cord or the USB flash drive from the projector
while the file is being written. If the power cord or drive is disconnected,
the projector may not start correctly.
j
Remove the USB flash drive.
gg Related Links
• "Batch Setup Error Notification" p.247
Batch Setup Error Notification
The projector's indicators notify you if an error occurs during a batch setup
operation. Check the status of the projector's indicators and follow the
instructions described in the table here.
Indicator status Problem and solution
• Lamp: Orange - flashing
fast
• Temp: Orange - flashing
fast
The batch setup file may be corrupt, or the USB flash
drive may not be connected correctly.
Disconnect the USB flash drive, unplug and then plug
in the projector's power cord, and then try again.
Indicator status Problem and solution
• Power: Blue - flashing
fast
• Status: Blue - flashing
fast
• Lamp: Orange - flashing
fast
• Temp: Orange - flashing
fast
Writing the settings may have failed and an error may
have occurred in the projector's firmware.
Stop using the projector, remove the power plug from
the electrical outlet. Contact Epson for help.
Maintaining the Projector
Follow the instructions in these sections to maintain your projector.
gg Related Links
• "Cleaning the Projection Window" p.249
• "Cleaning the Obstacle Sensor" p.250
• "Cleaning the Projector Case" p.251
• "Air Filter and Vent Maintenance" p.252
• "Projector Lamp Maintenance" p.256
• "Replacing the Remote Control Batteries" p.261
• "Replacing the Interactive Pen Battery" p.262
• "Replacing the Interactive Pen Tip" p.263
Cleaning the Projection Window
249
Clean the projection window periodically, or whenever you notice dust or
smudges on the surface. To remove dust or smudges, gently wipe the
projection window with lens-cleaning paper.
Warning
Do not use a lens cleaner that contains flammable gas. The high heat generated by
the projector may cause a fire.
Attention
Do not use glass cleaner or any harsh materials to clean the projection window and
do not subject the projection window to any impacts; otherwise, it could be
damaged.
Cleaning the Obstacle Sensor
250
Clean the projector's obstacle sensor glass periodically, or if you see a message
telling you to remove any obstacles that are interfering with the projection
area. To remove dust or smudges, gently wipe the lens with lens-cleaning
paper.
Warning
Do not use a lens cleaner that contains flammable gas to clean the obstacle sensor.
The high heat generated by the projector may cause a fire.
Attention
Do not use glass cleaner or any harsh materials to clean the obstacle sensor and do
not subject the obstacle sensor to any impacts. Damage on the surface of the sensor
may cause malfunctions.
Cleaning the Projector Case
251
Before cleaning the projector case, turn off the projector and unplug the
power cord.
• To remove dust or dirt, use a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
• To remove stubborn dirt, use a soft cloth moistened with water and mild
soap. Do not spray liquid directly on the projector.
Attention
Do not use wax, alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other chemicals to clean the
projector case. These can damage the case. Do not use canned air, or the gases
may leave a flammable residue.
Air Filter and Vent Maintenance
252
Regular filter maintenance is important to maintaining your projector. Clean
the air filer when a message appears telling you the temperature inside the
projector has reached a high level. It is recommended that you clean these
parts at least once every three months. Clean them more often than this if you
use the projector in a particularly dusty environment.
Attention
If regular maintenance is not performed, your Epson projector will notify you
when the temperature inside the projector has reached a high level. Do not wait
until this warning appears to maintain your projector filter as prolonged exposure
to high temperatures may reduce the life of your projector or lamp.
gg Related Links
• "Cleaning the Air Filter" p.252
• "Replacing the Air Filter" p.254
Cleaning the Air Filter
Clean the projector's air filter if it gets dusty, or if you see a message telling
you to clean it.
a
Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
b
Slide the air filter cover latch and open the air filter cover.
Air Filter and Vent Maintenance
253
c
Pull the air filter out of the projector.
d
Tap each side of the air filter 4 to 5 times to shake off any excess dust.
Attention
Do not use excessive force when tapping the air filter, or it may crack and
become unusable.
e
Vacuum the front of the air filter (the side with the tabs) to remove any
remaining dust.
Attention
• Do not rinse the air filter in water, or use any detergent or solvent to
clean it.
• Do not use canned air. The gases may leave a flammable residue or push
dust and debris into the projector's optics or other sensitive areas.
Air Filter and Vent Maintenance
254
f
Replace the air filter in the projector as shown and push gently until it
clicks into place.
g
Close the air filter cover.
Replacing the Air Filter
You need to replace the air filter in the following situations:
• After cleaning the air filter, you see a message telling you to clean or replace
it
• The air filter is torn or damaged
You can replace the air filter while the projector is mounted to the ceiling or
placed on a table.
a
Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
b
Slide the air filter cover latch and open the air filter cover.
Air Filter and Vent Maintenance
255
c
Pull the air filter out of the projector.
a
Dispose of used air filters according to local regulations.
• Filter frame: Polypropylene
• Filter: Polypropylene
d
Place the new air filter in the projector as shown and push gently until
it clicks into place.
e
Close the air filter cover.
gg Related Links
• "Replacement Parts" p.287
Projector Lamp Maintenance
256
The projector monitors the number of hours the lamp is used and displays
this information in the projector's menu system.
Replace the lamp as soon as possible when the following occurs:
• The projected image gets darker or quality declines
• A message is displayed when you turn on the projector telling you to replace
the lamp (the message is displayed 100 hours before the expected end of the
lamp life and appears for 30 seconds)
• The projector's power indicator is flashing blue and its lamp indicator is
flashing orange.
Attention
• If you continue to use the lamp after the replacement period has passed, the
possibility that the lamp may explode increases. When the lamp replacement
message appears, replace the lamp with a new one as soon as possible, even if it
is still working.
• Do not repeatedly turn off the power and then immediately turn it back on.
Turning the power on and off frequently may shorten the lamp's operating life.
• Depending on the characteristics of the lamp and the way it has been used, the
lamp may become darker or stop working before the lamp warning message
appears. You should always have a spare lamp unit ready in case it is needed.
• We recommend the use of genuine Epson replacement lamps. The use of non-
genuine lamps may affect projection quality and safety. Any damage or
malfunction caused by the use of non-genuine lamps may not be covered by
Epson's warranty.
Projector Lamp Maintenance
257
gg Related Links
• "Replacing the Lamp" p.257
• "Resetting the Lamp Timer" p.259
• "Projector Specifications" p.291
Replacing the Lamp
You can replace the lamp while the projector is placed on a table or mounted
to the ceiling.
Warning
• Let the lamp fully cool before replacing it to avoid injury.
• Never disassemble or modify the lamp. If a modified or disassembled lamp is
installed in the projector, it could cause a fire, electric shock, or other damage or
injury.
a
Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
b
Allow the projector lamp to cool down for at least one hour.
c
Use the screwdriver included with the replacement lamp to loosen the
screw securing the lamp cover.
Warning
When replacing the lamp, there is a possibility that the lamp may be
broken. If replacing the lamp of a projector which has been installed on the
wall or ceiling, you should always assume that the lamp is cracked, and you
should stand to the side of the lamp cover, not underneath it. Remove the
lamp cover gently. Be careful when removing the lamp cover as shards of
glass may fall out and could cause an injury. If any shards of glass get into
your eyes or mouth, contact a doctor immediately.
d
Slide off the lamp cover.
Projector Lamp Maintenance
258
a
When the projector is suspended from a wall or ceiling and you
need to replace the lamp, remove the lamp cover carefully and
support it with your hand to prevent it from falling.
e
Loosen the screws securing the lamp to the projector. The screws do
not come all the way out.
f
Grip the lamp handle and carefully pull the lamp out of the projector.
a
• If you notice the lamp is cracked when removing the lamp,
replace it with a new lamp, or contact Epson for help.
• The lamp(s) in this product contain mercury (Hg). Check your
local laws and regulations regarding disposal or recycling. Do
not put in the trash.
g
Gently insert the new lamp into the projector. If it does not fit easily,
make sure it is facing the right way. Press the handle up.
Attention
Do not touch any glass on the lamp assembly to avoid premature lamp
failure.
Projector Lamp Maintenance
259
h
Push in the lamp firmly and tighten the screws to secure it.
i
Replace the lamp cover and tighten the screw to secure it.
a
• Make sure the lamp cover is securely installed or the projector
will not turn on.
• Do not replace the lamp cover with too much force and make
sure the lamp cover is not deformed.
Reset the lamp timer to zero to monitor the new lamp's usage.
gg Related Links
• "Replacement Parts" p.287
Resetting the Lamp Timer
You must reset the lamp timer after replacing the projector's lamp to clear the
lamp replacement message and to monitor lamp usage correctly.
a
Do not reset the lamp timer if you have not replaced the lamp to avoid
inaccurate lamp usage information.
a
Turn on the projector.
b
Press the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.
c
Select the Reset menu and press [Enter].
Projector Lamp Maintenance
260
d
Select Reset Lamp Hours and press [Enter].
You see a prompt asking if you want to reset the lamp hours.
e
Select Yes and press [Enter].
f
Press [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.
Replacing the Remote Control Batteries
261
The remote control uses two AA manganese or alkaline batteries. Replace the
batteries as soon as they run out.
Attention
Make sure you read the Safety Instructions before handling the batteries.
a
Remove the battery cover as shown.
b
Remove the old batteries.
c
Insert the batteries with the + and – ends facing as shown.
Warning
Check the positions of the (+) and (–) marks inside the battery holder to
ensure the batteries are inserted the correct way. If the batteries are not used
correctly, they could explode or leak causing a fire, injury, or damage to the
product.
d
Replace the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.
Replacing the Interactive Pen Battery
262
The Interactive pen uses one AA manganese battery, AA alkaline battery, or
Eneloop (BK-3MCC) rechargeable battery. Replace the battery as soon as it
runs out.
When the battery is low, the pen indicator flashes when you press the button
on the side of the pen. When the battery runs out, the pen indicator turns off.
Attention
Make sure you read the Safety Instructions before handling the batteries.
a
Remove the battery cover as shown.
b
Remove the old battery.
c
Insert the battery with the + and – ends facing in the correct direction
as shown.
Warning
Check the positions of the (+) and (–) marks inside the battery holder to
ensure the battery is inserted in the correct direction. If the battery is not
used correctly, it could explode or leak causing a fire, injury, or damage to
the product.
d
Replace the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.
Replacing the Interactive Pen Tip
263
Two interactive pens come with two types of pen tips, soft tips and hard tips.
The soft pen tips are installed on the pens by default.
• If the soft tip gets dirty or damaged, it becomes less responsive. Replace it
with a new one supplied with the product.
• If the soft tip is hard to use on a textured surface, replace it with the hard
tip.
a
If the hard tip is worn down or damaged, replace it with a new one.
gg Related Links
• "Replacing the Soft Pen Tip" p.263
• "Replacing the Soft Pen Tip with the Hard Pen Tip" p.264
Replacing the Soft Pen Tip
a
Twist off the tip of the interactive pen to remove it.
b
Pull the soft tip straight out.
c
Insert the new tip.
d
Twist on the pen tip.
Replacing the Interactive Pen Tip
264
Replacing the Soft Pen Tip with the Hard Pen Tip
a
Twist off the tip of the interactive pen to remove it.
b
Twist on the hard pen tip.
Solving Problems
Check the solutions in these sections if you have any problems using the projector.
gg Related Links
• "Projection Problems" p.266
• "Projector Indicator Status" p.267
• "Using the Projector Help Displays" p.269
• "Solving Image or Sound Problems" p.270
• "Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems" p.276
• "Solving Interactive Features Problems" p.278
• "Solving Network Problems" p.282
Projection Problems
266
If the projector is not working properly, turn it off, unplug it, and then plug it
back in and turn it on.
If this does not solve the problem, check the following:
• The indicators on the projector may indicate the problem.
• The projector's Help system can display information about common
problems.
• The solutions in this manual can help you solve many problems.
If none of these solutions help, contact Epson for technical support.
Projector Indicator Status
267
The indicators on the projector indicate the projector status and let you know
when a problem occurs. Check the status and color of the indicators and then
refer to this table for a solution.
a
• If the indicators display a pattern not listed in the table below, turn
the projector off, unplug it, and contact Epson for help.
A
Power indicator
B
Status indicator
C
Lamp indicator
D
Temp (temperature) indicator
Projector status
Indicator and status Problem and solutions
Power: Lit blue
Status: Lit blue
Lamp: Off
Temp: Off
Normal operation.
Power: Lit blue
Status: Flashing blue
Lamp: Off
Temp: Off
Warming up or shutting down. When warming up, wait
about 30 seconds for an image to appear.
All buttons are disabled during warm-up and shutting
down.
Power: Lit blue
Status: Off
Lamp: Off
Temp: Off
Standby, sleep mode, or monitoring.
When you press the power button, projection starts.
Power: Flashing blue
Status: Off
Lamp: Off
Temp: Off
Preparing for monitoring and all features are disabled.
Power: Flashing blue
Status: Indicator status
varies
Lamp: Indicator status
varies
Temp: Flashing orange
Projector is too hot.
• Make sure that the vents and air filter are not clogged
with dust or obstructed by nearby objects.
• Clean or replace the air filter.
• Make sure the environmental temperature is not too
hot.
Projector Indicator Status
268
Indicator and status Problem and solutions
Power: Off
Status: Flashing blue
Lamp: Off
Temp: Lit orange
Projector has overheated and turned off. Leave it turned
off to cool down for 5 minutes.
• Make sure that the vents and air filter are not clogged
with dust or obstructed by nearby objects.
• Clean or replace the air filter.
• If operating the projector at high altitude, set the High
Altitude Mode setting to On in the projector's
Extended menu.
s Extended > Operation > High Altitude Mode
• If the problem persists, unplug the projector and
contact Epson for help.
Power: Off
Status: Flashing blue
Lamp: Lit orange
Temp: Off
Lamp has a problem.
• Check to see if the lamp is burned out, broken, or
installed incorrectly. Reseat or replace the lamp as
necessary.
• Clean the air filter.
• If operating the projector at high altitude, set the High
Altitude Mode setting to On in the projector's
Extended menu.
s Extended > Operation > High Altitude Mode
• If the problem persists, unplug the projector and
contact Epson for help.
Power: Flashing blue
Status: Indicator status
varies
Lamp: Flashing orange
Temp: Indicator status
varies
Replace the lamp soon to avoid damage. Do not
continue using the projector.
Power: Off
Status: Flashing blue
Lamp: Off
Temp: Flashing orange
A fan or sensor has a problem. Turn the projector off,
unplug it, and contact Epson for help.
Indicator and status Problem and solutions
Power: Off
Status: Flashing blue
Lamp: Flashing orange
Temp: Off
Internal projector error. Turn the projector off, unplug
it, and contact Epson for help.
Power: Off
Status: Flashing blue
Lamp: Flashing orange
Temp: Flashing orange
Auto iris error. Turn the projector off, unplug it, and
contact Epson for help.
Power: Off
Status: Flashing blue
Lamp: Lit orange
Temp: Lit orange
Power error (Ballast). Turn the projector off, unplug it,
and contact Epson for help.
Power: Flashing blue
Status: Indicator status
varies
Lamp: Flashing orange
Temp: Flashing orange
Obstacle detection warning. A beep sounds, and the
message "For safety purposes remove any obstacles
blocking the lens." is displayed.
• Make sure that there are no obstacles interfering with
the projection window. Remove any obstacles.
• Clean the obstacle sensor if there are no obstacles.
The projector turns off automatically if no action is
taken.
Power: Off
Status: Flashing blue
Lamp: Lit orange
Temp: Lit orange
Obstacle detection error. Turn the projector off, unplug
it, and contact Epson for help.
gg Related Links
• "Cleaning the Air Filter" p.252
• "Replacing the Air Filter" p.254
• "Replacing the Lamp" p.257
Using the Projector Help Displays
269
You can display information to help you solve common problems using the
projector's Help system.
a
Turn on the projector.
b
Press the [Home] button on the control panel or remote control.
c
Select the icon on the Home screen.
d
Select Display the Help menu on the displayed message.
The Help menu is displayed.
e
Use the up and down arrow buttons to highlight the problem you want
to solve.
f
Press [Enter] to view the solutions.
g
Perform one of the following actions when you are finished.
• To select another problem to solve, press [Esc].
• To exit the help system, press [Menu].
Solving Image or Sound Problems
270
Check the solutions in these sections if you have any problems with projected
images or sound.
gg Related Links
• "Solutions When No Image Appears" p.270
• "Solutions When Image is Incorrect Using the USB Display Function" p.270
• "Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears" p.271
• "Solutions When "Not Supported" Message Appears" p.272
• "Solutions When Only a Partial Image Appears" p.272
• "Solutions When the Image is not Rectangular" p.272
• "Solutions When the Image Contains Noise or Static" p.273
• "Solutions When the Image is Fuzzy or Blurry" p.273
• "Solutions When the Image Brightness or Colors are Incorrect" p.274
• "Solutions to Sound Problems" p.274
• "Solutions When Image File Names are not Displayed Correctly in PC Free"
p.275
Solutions When No Image Appears
If no image appears, try the following solutions:
• Press the power button to turn the power on.
• Press the [A/V Mute] button on the remote control to see if the image was
temporarily turned off.
• Make sure all necessary cables are securely connected and the power is on
for the projector and connected video sources.
• Make sure the image being projected is not completely black (only when
projecting computer images).
• Make sure the projector's menu settings are correct.
• Press the projector's power button to wake it from standby or sleep mode.
Also, check if the connected computer is in sleep mode or displaying a
blank screen saver.
• Check the settings on the projector's Signal menu to make sure they are
correct for the current video source.
• Adjust the Brightness setting in the projector's Image menu.
• Select Normal as the Power Consumption setting.
s ECO > Power Consumption
• Check the Display setting in the projector's Extended menu to make sure
Messages is set to On.
• If the projector does not respond when you press the control panel buttons,
the buttons may be locked for security. Unlock the buttons in the Control
Panel Lock setting in the projector's Settings menu or use the remote
control to turn on the projector.
s Settings > Lock Setting > Control Panel Lock
• If the projector does not respond when you press buttons on the remote
control, make sure the remote receivers are turned on.
• For images projected with Windows Media Center, reduce the screen size
from full screen mode.
• For images projected from applications using Windows DirectX, turn off
DirectX functions.
• The projector may not be able to project copyrighted videos that you play
back on a computer. For more details, see the manual supplied with the
computer.
gg Related Links
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu" p.214
• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.212
• "Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu" p.240
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
• "Unlocking the Projector's Buttons" p.172
Solutions When Image is Incorrect Using the USB
Display Function
If no image appears or if the image appears incorrectly using the USB Display
function, try the following solutions:
• Press the [Source Search] button on the control pad, remote control, or
control panel and select USB Display.
• Make sure the Epson USB Display software has been installed correctly.
Solving Image or Sound Problems
271
Depending on your OS or computer settings, the software may not have
been installed automatically. Download the latest software from the
following Web site and install it.
http://www.epson.com/
• For Mac, select the USB Display icon in the Dock folder. If the icon does
not appear on the Dock, double-click USB Display in the Applications
folder.
If you select Exit from the USB Display icon menu on the Dock, USB
Display does not start automatically when you connect the USB cable.
• For images projected with Windows Media Center, reduce the screen size
from full screen mode.
• For images projected from applications using Windows DirectX, turn off
DirectX functions.
• If the mouse cursor flickers, select Make the movement of the mouse
pointer smooth in the Epson USB Display Settings program on your
computer.
• Turn off the Transfer layered window setting in the Epson USB Display
Settings program on your computer.
• For projectors with a resolution of WUXGA (1920 × 1200), if you change
the computer resolution during projection, the performance and quality of
the video may decline.
• Select USB Display/Easy Interactive Function or Wireless Mouse/USB
Display as the USB Type B setting in the projector's Extended menu.
gg Related Links
• "Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio" p.29
Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears
If the "No Signal" message appears, try the following solutions:
• Press the [Source Search] button and wait a few seconds for an image to
appear.
• Turn on the connected computer or video source, and press play to begin
your presentation, if necessary.
• Check that all cables required for projection are securely connected.
• Connect the video source directly to the projector.
• If you are projecting from a laptop computer, make sure it is set up to
display on an external monitor.
• Make sure the connected computer is not in sleep mode.
• If necessary, turn off the projector and the connected computer or video
source, and then turn them back on.
• If you are projecting from an HDMI source, replace the HDMI cable with
the shorter one.
gg Related Links
• "Displaying From a Laptop" p.271
• "Displaying From a Mac Laptop" p.272
Displaying From a Laptop
If the message "No Signal" is displayed when projecting from a laptop, you
need to set up the laptop to display on an external monitor.
a
Hold down the laptop's Fn key and press the key labeled with a monitor
icon or CRT/LCD. (See your laptop manual for details.) Wait a few
seconds for an image to appear.
b
To display on the laptop's monitor and the projector, try pressing the
same keys again.
c
If the same image is not displayed by the laptop and projector, check
the Windows Display utility to make sure the external monitor port is
enabled and extended desktop mode is disabled. (See your computer or
Windows manual for instructions.)
d
If necessary, check your video card settings and set the multiple display
option to Clone or Mirror.
Solving Image or Sound Problems
272
Displaying From a Mac Laptop
If the message "No Signal" is displayed when projecting from a Mac laptop,
you need to set up the laptop for mirrored display. (See your laptop manual
for details.)
a
Open the System Preferences utility and select Displays.
b
Select the Display or Color LCD option, if necessary.
c
Click the Arrange or Arrangement tab.
d
Select Mirror Displays.
Solutions When "Not Supported" Message Appears
If the message "Not supported" is displayed, try the following solutions:
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected in the projector's Signal menu.
• Make sure the computer's display resolution does not exceed the projector's
resolution and frequency limits. If necessary, select a different display
resolution for your computer. (See your computer manual for details.)
gg Related Links
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu" p.214
• "Supported Monitor Display Resolutions" p.289
Solutions When Only a Partial Image Appears
If only a partial computer image appears, try the following solutions:
• If you are projecting from a computer using a VGA computer cable, press
the [Auto] button on the remote control to optimize the image signal.
• Try adjusting the image position using the Position setting in the
projector's Signal menu.
• Press the [Aspect] button on the remote control to select a different image
aspect ratio.
• Change the Resolution setting in the projector's Signal menu according to
the signal for the connected equipment.
• If you zoomed into or out of the image using the [E-Zoom] buttons, press
the [Esc] button until the projector returns to a full display.
• Check your computer display settings to disable dual display and set the
resolution within the projector's limits. (See your computer manual for
details.)
• Check the resolution assigned to your presentation files to see if they are
created for a different resolution. (See your software help for details.)
• Make sure you selected the correct projection mode. You can select this
using the Projection setting in the projector's Extended menu.
• Perform Image Shift to adjust the image position after adjusting the image
size or correcting keystone distortion.
gg Related Links
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu" p.214
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
• "Supported Monitor Display Resolutions" p.289
• "Adjusting the Image Position" p.67
Solutions When the Image is not Rectangular
If the projected image is not evenly rectangular, try the following solutions:
• Place the projector directly in front of the center of the screen, facing it
squarely, if possible.
• Press the keystone buttons on the projector to adjust the image shape.
• Adjust the Quick Corner setting to correct the image shape.
s Settings > Geometry Correction > Quick Corner
• Adjust the Arc Correction setting to correct the image shape projected on a
curved surface.
s Settings > Geometry Correction > Arc Correction
Solving Image or Sound Problems
273
gg Related Links
• "Correcting the Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons" p.59
• "Correcting the Image Shape with Quick Corner" p.60
• "Correcting Image Shape with Curved Surface" p.62
Solutions When the Image Contains Noise or Static
If the projected image contains electronic interference (noise) or static, try the
following solutions:
• Check the cables connecting your computer or video source to the
projector. They should be:
• Separated from the power cord to prevent interference
• Securely connected at both ends
• Not connected to an extension cable
• Check the settings in the projector's Signal menu to make sure they match
the video source.
• If available for your video source, adjust the Deinterlacing and Noise
Reduction settings in the projector's Image menu.
• Select a computer video resolution and refresh rate that are compatible with
the projector.
• If you are projecting from a computer using a VGA computer cable, press
the [Auto] button on the remote control to automatically adjust the
Tracking and Sync. settings. If the images are not adjusted correctly,
manually adjust the Tracking and Sync. settings in the projector's Signal
menu.
• Select Auto as the Resolution setting in the projector's Signal menu.
• If you adjusted the image shape using the projector controls, try decreasing
the Sharpness setting in the projector's Image menu to improve image
quality.
• If you connected an extension power cable, try projecting without it to see if
it caused interference in the signal.
• If you are using the USB Display function, turn off the Transfer layered
window setting in the Epson USB Display Settings program on your
computer.
gg Related Links
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu" p.214
• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.212
• "Supported Monitor Display Resolutions" p.289
Solutions When the Image is Fuzzy or Blurry
If the projected image is fuzzy or blurry, try the following solutions:
• Adjust the image focus.
• Clean the projection window.
a
To avoid condensation on the lens after bringing the projector in
from a cold environment, let the projector warm up to room
temperature before using it.
• Position the projector close enough to the screen.
• Position the projector so the keystone adjustment angle is not so wide that it
distorts the image.
• Adjust the Sharpness setting in the projector's Image menu to improve
image quality.
• If you are projecting from a computer using a VGA computer cable, press
the [Auto] button on the remote control to automatically adjust the tracking
and sync. If any bands or overall blurriness remain, display a uniformly
patterned image on the screen and manually adjust the Tracking and Sync.
settings in the projector's Signal menu.
• If you are projecting from a computer, use a lower resolution or select a
resolution that matches the projector's native resolution.
gg Related Links
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu" p.214
• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.212
Solving Image or Sound Problems
274
• "Supported Monitor Display Resolutions" p.289
• "Cleaning the Obstacle Sensor" p.250
Solutions When the Image Brightness or Colors are
Incorrect
If the projected image is too dark or light, or the colors are incorrect, try the
following solutions:
• Press the [Color Mode] button on the remote control to try different color
modes for the image and environment.
• Check your video source settings.
• Adjust the available settings in the projector's Image menu for the current
input source, such as Brightness, Contrast, Tint, Color Temp., and/or
Color Saturation.
• Make sure you selected the correct Input Signal or Video Signal setting in
the projector's Signal menu, if available for your image source.
s Signal > Advanced > Input Signal
s Signal > Advanced > Video Signal
• Make sure you selected the correct Gamma or RGBCMY setting in the
projector's Image menu.
s Image > Advanced
• Make sure all the cables are securely connected to the projector and your
video device. If you connected long cables, try connecting shorter cables.
• If you are using ECO as Power Consumption, try selecting Normal.
s ECO > Power Consumption
a
At high altitudes or locations subject to high temperatures, the image
may become darker and you may not be able to adjust the Power
Consumption setting.
• Position the projector close enough to the screen.
• If the image has been progressively darkening, you may need to replace the
projector lamp soon.
gg Related Links
• "Color Mode" p.72
• "Input Signal Settings - Signal Menu" p.214
• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.212
• "Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu" p.240
Solutions to Sound Problems
If there is no sound or the volume is too low or high, try the following
solutions:
• Adjust the projector's volume settings.
• Press the [A/V Mute] button on the remote control to resume video and
audio if they were temporarily stopped.
• Check your computer or video source to make sure the volume is turned up
and the audio output is set for the correct source.
• Disconnect the audio cable, and then reconnect it.
• Check the audio cable connections between the projector and your video
source.
• If you do not hear sound from an HDMI source, set the connected device to
PCM output.
• Make sure any connected audio cables are labeled "No Resistance".
• If you are using the USB Display function, turn on the Output audio from
the projector setting in the Epson USB Display Settings program on your
computer.
• Select the correct audio input in the A/V Settings setting in the projector's
Extended menu.
• When you are connecting the projector to a Mac using an HDMI cable,
make sure your Mac supports audio through the HDMI port.
• If you want to use a connected audio source when the projector is off, set
the Standby Mode option to Communication On in the projector's ECO
menu and make sure the A/V Settings options are set correctly in the
projector's Extended menu.
Solving Image or Sound Problems
275
• If the volume for the computer is set to the minimum while the projector is
set to the maximum, the noise may be mixed. Turn up the computer's
volume and turn down the projector's volume. (When you use Epson
iProjection (Windows/Mac) or USB Display.)
gg Related Links
• "Projector Connections" p.28
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
• "Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu" p.240
• "Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons" p.77
Solutions When Image File Names are not Displayed
Correctly in PC Free
If any file names are longer than the display area or include unsupported
symbols, the file names are shortened or changed in PC Free. Shorten or
change the file name.
Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems
276
Check the solutions in these sections if you have problems operating the
projector or remote control.
gg Related Links
• "Solutions to Projector Power or Shut-Off Problems" p.276
• "Solutions to Problems with the Remote Control" p.276
• "Solutions to Password Problems" p.277
• "Solution When "The Battery that Saves Your Clock Settings is Running
Low" Message Appears" p.277
Solutions to Projector Power or Shut-Off Problems
If the projector does not turn on when you press the power button or it turns
off unexpectedly, try the following solutions:
• Make sure the power cord is securely connected to the projector and to a
working electrical outlet.
• The projector's buttons may be locked for security. Unlock the buttons in
the Control Panel Lock setting in the projector's Settings menu or use the
remote control to turn on the projector.
s Settings > Lock Setting > Control Panel Lock
• The power cord may be defective. Disconnect the cord and contact Epson
for help.
• If the projector's lamp turns off unexpectedly, it may have entered sleep
mode after a period of inactivity. Perform any operation to wake the
projector. To turn off sleep mode, select Off as the Sleep Mode setting in
the projector's ECO menu.
• If the projector's lamp turns off unexpectedly, the A/V mute timer may be
enabled. To turn off the A/V mute timer, select Off as the A/V Mute Timer
setting in the projector's ECO menu.
• If the projector's lamp turns off, the status indicator is flashing, and the
temp (temperature) indicator is lit, the projector has overheated and turned
off.
• If the power button on the remote control does not turn on the projector,
check its batteries and make sure at least one of the remote receivers are
available in the Remote Receiver setting in the projector's Settings menu.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu" p.240
• "Projector Indicator Status" p.267
• "Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu" p.216
• "Unlocking the Projector's Buttons" p.172
Solutions to Problems with the Remote Control
If the projector does not respond to remote control commands, try the
following solutions:
• Check that the remote control batteries are installed correctly and have
power. If necessary, replace the batteries.
• Make sure you are operating the remote control within the reception angle
and range of the projector.
• Make sure the projector is not warming up or shutting down.
• Check to see if a button on the remote control is stuck down, causing it to
enter sleep mode. Release the button to wake the remote control up.
• Strong fluorescent lighting, direct sunlight, or infrared device signals may be
interfering with the projector's remote receivers. Dim the lights or move the
projector away from the sun or interfering equipment.
• Make sure at least one of the remote receivers are available in the Remote
Receiver setting in the projector's Settings menu.
• If the Remote Receiver setting is disabled, hold down the [Menu] button on
the remote control for at least 15 seconds to reset the setting to its default.
• If you assigned an ID number to the projector to operate multiple projectors
from the remote control, you may need to check or change the ID setting.
• If you lose the remote control, you can order another one from Epson.
gg Related Links
• "Remote Control Operation" p.45
• "Projector Feature Settings - Settings Menu" p.216
• "Selecting the Projector You want to Operate" p.161
• "Replacing the Remote Control Batteries" p.261
Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems
277
Solutions to Password Problems
If you cannot enter or remember a password, try the following solutions:
• You may have turned on password protection without first setting a
password. Try entering 0000 using the remote control.
• If you have entered an incorrect password too many times and see a
message displaying a request code, write down the code and contact Epson
for help. Provide the request code and proof of ownership for assistance in
unlocking the projector.
• If you lose the remote control you cannot enter a password. Order a new
one from Epson.
Solution When "The Battery that Saves Your Clock
Settings is Running Low" Message Appears
If the message "The battery that saves your clock settings is running low." is
displayed, contact Epson for help.
Solving Interactive Features Problems
278
Check the solutions in these sections if you have problems using the
interactive features.
gg Related Links
• "Solutions When "Error Occurred in the Easy Interactive Function" Message
Appears" p.278
• "Solutions When the Interactive Pens Do Not Work" p.278
• "Solutions When Manual Calibration Does Not Work" p.279
• "Solutions When You Cannot Operate a Computer from the Projected
Screen" p.279
• "Solutions When the Interactive Pen Position Is Not Accurate" p.279
• "Solutions When the Interactive Pens Are Slow or Difficult to Use" p.280
• "Solutions When the Interactive Touch Operation Does Not Work" p.280
• "Solutions for Problems with Capturing, Printing, Saving, or Scanning"
p.280
• "Solutions When Inking Does Not Appear in Microsoft Office" p.281
• "Solutions for Problems with a Shared Whiteboard" p.281
• "Solutions When the Time Is Incorrect in Whiteboard Settings" p.281
Solutions When "Error Occurred in the Easy
Interactive Function" Message Appears
If the "Error occurred in the Easy Interactive Function" message appears,
contact Epson for help.
Solutions When the Interactive Pens Do Not Work
If the interactive pens do not work, try the following solutions:
• Make sure you are not covering the black section near the tip of the pen.
• Try holding the pen at a different angle so that your hand is not blocking
the signal.
• Press the button on the side of the pen to check the remaining battery
power. If the battery indicator does not turn on, replace the battery.
• Make sure the pen tip is securely attached to the pen.
• If the pen tip is worn out or damaged, you may need to replace it.
• Make sure nothing is blocking the signal between the pen and the
interactive pen receiver on the projector.
• Make sure the cable cover is in place to keep cables from blocking the
signal.
• Dim the room lights and turn off any fluorescent lights. Make sure the
projection surface and pen receiver are not in direct sunlight or other
sources of bright lighting.
• Make sure the interactive pen receiver on the projector is clean and free
from dust.
• Make sure there is no interference from infrared remote controls, mice, or
infrared microphones.
• Make sure you perform pen calibration when using the interactive pen for
the first time so that the projector recognizes the position of the pen
correctly.
• Make sure Pen Mode and Pen Operation Mode settings are set correctly in
the Easy Interactive Function options on the Extended menu.
• When using multiple projectors and interactive pens in the same room,
interference may cause pen operations to become unstable. Connect the
optional remote control cable set. If you do not have a remote control cable
set, change the Distance of Projectors setting in the projector's Extended
menu.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > General > Advanced >
Distance of Projectors
• Try replacing the soft pen tip with the hard pen tip. Doing so may improve
pen operations because some of the projector models do not support the
soft pen tip.
gg Related Links
• "Replacing the Interactive Pen Tip" p.263
• "Pen Calibration" p.82
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
• "Replacing the Interactive Pen Battery" p.262
Solving Interactive Features Problems
279
Solutions When Manual Calibration Does Not Work
If you are having trouble calibrating manually, try the following solutions:
• Make sure the projector is not too close to the projection surface.
• Move the projector or turn off the interfering device, such as a light source
that is emitting infrared rays.
Solutions When You Cannot Operate a Computer
from the Projected Screen
If you cannot operate a computer from the projected screen, try the following
solutions:
• Make sure the USB Type B option on the Extended menu is set to Easy
Interactive Function or USB Display/Easy Interactive Function.
• Make sure you perform pen calibration when using the interactive pen for
the first time so that the projector recognizes the position of the pen
correctly.
• Press the [Pen Mode] button on the remote control to select PC Interactive
as the Pen Mode setting. You can also select the Pen Mode setting from the
projector's Extended menu.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > Pen Mode
• Make sure the USB cable is securely connected. Disconnect the USB cable,
and then reconnect it.
• When projecting an image using two projectors installed side by side, you
need to select the Multi-Projection setting to use the interactive features.
You also need to install Easy Interactive Driver Ver. 4.0 from the Epson
Projector Software for Easy Interactive Function CD-ROM on the computer
that you want to operate from the projected screen.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > Advanced > Multi-Projection
• When projecting an image with only one of the two projectors installed side
by side, you may not be able to operate a computer from the projected
screen. Select the icon on the Home screen, and then set Use this
single projector to On.
gg Related Links
• "Pen Calibration" p.82
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
Solutions When the Interactive Pen Position Is Not
Accurate
If the pen position is not the same as the mouse pointer, try the following
solutions:
• Make sure you perform pen calibration when using the interactive pen for
the first time so that the projector recognizes the position of the pen
correctly. If the cursor location and pen position do not match after auto
calibration, you can calibrate manually.
• Make sure the cable cover is in place to keep cables from blocking the
signal.
• Try adjusting the pen operation area.
• If you use the [E-Zoom] + button on the remote control to enlarge the
image, the pen position is not accurate. When you return the image to the
original size, the position should be correct.
• If you set Pen Mode to PC Interactive in the projector's Extended menu,
set Auto Adjust Pen Area to Off, and then select Manual Adj. Pen Area.
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > General > Advanced > Auto
Adjust Pen Area
s Extended > Easy Interactive Function > General > Advanced >
Manual Adj. Pen Area
gg Related Links
• "Pen Calibration" p.82
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
• "Adjusting the Pen Operation Area" p.123
Solving Interactive Features Problems
280
Solutions When the Interactive Pens Are Slow or
Difficult to Use
If the pens are difficult to use or respond too slowly, try the following
solutions:
• For easier operation, hold the pen perpendicular to the projection surface.
• For the best performance, connect your computer to the projector using a
VGA or HDMI cable for display and the USB cable for the interactive
features.
• If you are using USB Display in Windows, you may need to disable
Windows Aero in the Epson USB Display Settings program on your
computer.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Connections" p.28
Solutions When the Interactive Touch Operation
Does Not Work
If the interactive touch operation using your finger does not work, try the
following solutions (EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui):
• Make sure the Touch Unit is installed correctly and the power cable is
properly connected. See your projector's Installation Guide for details.
• If the indicator on the Touch Unit is not on, check that Touch Unit Setup -
Power is set to On in the projector's Extended menu.
• Adjust the angle on the Touch Unit. See your projector's Installation Guide
for details.
• Make sure there are no obstacles (such as cables or pen stand) between the
Touch Unit's laser diffusion port and the projection surface. If there are any
obstacles that are difficult to move, attach the infrared deflectors to the
projection surface. See your projector's Installation Guide for details.
• Make sure there is no interference from infrared remote controls, mice, or
infrared microphones.
• If your finger position and the cursor position on the screen do not match,
perform Touch Calibration in the projector's Extended menu.
• If there are any people within 10 cm in front of or around the projection
screen or any obstacles causing interference, the touch operations may not
work properly.
• If clothing, or any part of your body comes close to the screen, the touch
operations may not work properly. Move at least 1 cm away from the
screen.
• If touch operations do not work correctly even after performing calibration,
press the icon on the Home screen to check the Calibration Range
setting.
• If touch operations are mistakenly recognized as dragging operations,
select Wide.
• If mouse operations are not performed smoothly, select Narrow.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Setup Settings - Extended Menu" p.219
• "Using Interactive Touch Operations with Your Finger" p.85
Solutions for Problems with Capturing, Printing,
Saving, or Scanning
If you are having trouble capturing and pasting, or printing, saving, or
scanning, try the following solutions:
• If you are having trouble pasting a captured image, make sure the image is
not protected.
• If a black frame appears around a pasted image, it may be because the image
was shifted or resized.
• If you are having trouble printing or scanning, make sure the printer is not
out of ink, jammed, or in any other error state.
• For USB printing or scanning, make sure a USB cable is connected between
the projector's USB-A port and the USB-B port on the control pad. Make
Solving Interactive Features Problems
281
sure another USB cable is connected between the Printer port (USB-A port)
on the control pad and the printer itself.
• For USB printing or scanning, try connecting a different USB cable, and
make sure the cables are less than 4.9 m long.
• When scanning from the ADF, make sure you load paper in advance.
• Connect only one printer or multifunction device at a time, and make sure
the device is supported by the projector.
• Check the Whiteboard Settings on the projector's Extended menu.
Solutions When Inking Does Not Appear in Microsoft
Office
If Start Inking does not appear on the Review tab in your Microsoft Office
application, try this solution.
Open the projector's Extended menu and change the Pen Operation Mode
setting in Easy Interactive Function:
Solutions for Problems with a Shared Whiteboard
If you are having problems with a shared whiteboard, try the following
solutions:
• Connect the projector to the same network as the projector that is sharing
its whiteboard.
• If you enter the wrong PIN code 10 times in 10 minutes, you cannot
connect to the whiteboard for three minutes. Try again after three minutes.
• Make sure Sharing is displayed on the status bar. If it is not displayed, re-
connect to the shared whiteboard.
• If you want to save the shared whiteboard screen as a file from a Web
browser, follow the steps below:
1. Select the icon on the bottom tool bar and select Stop Sharing, or
select the icon on the status bar.
2. Select Distribute to Participants.
3. Select Save depending on the message displayed on the device to which
you want to save the screen.
4. Save the file on the device. For details, see the documentation supplied
with the device.
Solutions When the Time Is Incorrect in Whiteboard
Settings
If the time is incorrect on internal storage settings for whiteboard mode, you
may need to update the Date & Time settings on the projector's Extended
menu.
s Extended > Operation > Date & Time
Solving Network Problems
282
Check the solutions in these sections if you have problems using the projector
on a network.
gg Related Links
• "Solutions When Wireless Authentication Fails" p.282
• "Solutions When You Cannot Access the Projector Through the Web" p.282
• "Solutions When Network Alert E-Mails are not Received" p.282
• "Solutions When the Image Contains Static During Network Projection"
p.283
• "Solutions When You Cannot Connect Using Screen Mirroring" p.283
• "Solutions When the Image or Sound Contains Static During Screen
Mirroring Connection" p.283
Solutions When Wireless Authentication Fails
If you are having trouble with the authentication, try the following solutions:
• If the wireless settings are correct, but authentication fails, you may need to
update the Date & Time settings on the projector's Extended menu.
s Extended > Operation > Date & Time
• Check the Security settings in the projector's Network menu.
s Network > Network Configuration > Wireless LAN
Solutions When You Cannot Access the Projector
Through the Web
If you are unable to access the projector through a Web browser, make sure
you are using the correct ID and password.
• To display the Web Control screen, enter EPSONWEB as the user ID. (You
cannot change the user ID.)
• To display the Web Remote screen, enter EPSONREMOTE as the user ID.
(You cannot change the user ID.)
• For the password, enter the password set in the projector's Network menu.
The default password is admin.
s Network > Network Configuration > Basic > Web Control Password
s Network > Network Configuration > Basic > Remote Password
• Make sure you have access to the network the projector is on.
• If your Web browser is set up to connect via a proxy server, the Web
Control screen cannot be displayed. Make settings for a connection without
using a proxy server.
a
The user ID and password are case sensitive.
gg Related Links
• "Network Menu - Basic Menu" p.233
Solutions When Network Alert E-Mails are not
Received
If you do not receive an e-mail alerting you to problems with a projector over
the network, try the following solutions:
• Make sure the projector is turned on and connected to the network
correctly. (If an error shuts down the projector, the email may not be
delivered.)
• Make sure you set up the projector e-mail alert settings correctly on the
projector's network Notifications menu or in the network software.
• Set the Standby Mode setting to Communication On in the projector's
ECO menu so the network software can monitor the projector in standby
mode.
• Make sure your electrical outlet or power source is functioning correctly.
gg Related Links
• "Network Menu - Notifications Menu" p.237
Solving Network Problems
283
Solutions When the Image Contains Static During
Network Projection
If the projected image contains static during network projection, try the
following solutions:
• Check for any obstacles between the access point, the computer, the mobile
device, and the projector, and change their positions to improve
communication.
• Make sure that the access point, the computer, the mobile device and the
projector are not too far apart. Move them closer together and try to
connect again.
• Check for interference from other equipment, such as a Bluetooth device or
microwave. Move the interfering device farther away or expand your
wireless bandwidth.
• Reduce the number of connected devices if the connection speed declines.
Solutions When You Cannot Connect Using Screen
Mirroring
If you are unable to connect to the projector using Screen Mirroring, try the
following solutions (EB-1460Ui):
• Check the projector's settings.
• Select On as the Screen Mirroring setting in the projector's Network
menu.
• Change the Display Name so that it does not include "-" in the projector's
Screen Mirroring Settings setting menu or it may not be displayed
correctly on your mobile device.
s Network > Screen Mirroring Settings > Display Name
• Select Off as the Screen Mirroring setting in the projector's Network
menu, and select On again.
• Change the Operation Mode setting and connect again.
s Network > Screen Mirroring Settings > Operation Mode
• Make sure that the no other devices are connected to the projector with
No Interruptions settings.
s Network > Screen Mirroring Settings > Extended > Meeting Mode
• Change the Channel setting according to the wireless LAN environment.
s Network > Screen Mirroring Settings > Extended > Channel
• Check the mobile device's settings.
• Make sure the settings on the mobile device are correct.
• When connecting again immediately after disconnecting, it may take
some time until the connection is established. Reconnect after waiting for
a while.
• Restart the mobile device.
• Once you have connected using Screen Mirroring, the projector
connection information may be recorded on the mobile device. However,
you may not be able to reconnect to the projector from the recorded
information. Select the projector from the list of available devices.
gg Related Links
• "Projector Network Settings - Network Menu" p.231
• "Network Menu - Screen Mirroring Settings" p.232
Solutions When the Image or Sound Contains Static
During Screen Mirroring Connection
If the projected image or sound contains static when connecting using Screen
Mirroring, try the following solutions (EB-1460Ui):
• Avoid covering the Wi-Fi antenna of the mobile device.
• If you use a Screen Mirroring connection and an internet connection at the
same time, the image may stop or contain noise. Disconnect the internet
connection to expand your wireless bandwidth and improve the connection
speed of the mobile device.
• Make sure the projection contents meet the Screen Mirroring requirements.
• Depending on the settings of the mobile device, the connection may be lost
when the device enters power saving mode. Check the electrical power
saving settings on the mobile device.
Solving Network Problems
284
• Update to the latest version of the wireless driver or firmware on the mobile
device.
gg Related Links
• "Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring)"
p.185
Appendix
Check these sections for the technical specifications and important notices about your projector.
gg Related Links
• "Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts" p.286
• "Screen Size and Projection Distance" p.288
• "Supported Monitor Display Resolutions" p.289
• "Projector Specifications" p.291
• "Connector Specifications" p.293
• "External Dimensions" p.294
• "USB Display System Requirements" p.296
• "Easy Interactive Driver System Requirements" p.297
• "List of Safety Symbols (corresponding to IEC60950-1 A2)" p.298
• "Glossary" p.300
• "Notices" p.302
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts
286
The following optional accessories and replacement parts are available. Please
purchase these products as and when needed.
The following list of optional accessories and replacement parts is current as
of: September 2016.
Details of accessories are subject to change without notice and availability
may vary depending on the country of purchase.
gg Related Links
• "Cables" p.286
• "Mounts" p.286
• "For Interactive Feature" p.286
• "For Wireless Connection" p.286
• "External Devices" p.287
• "Replacement Parts" p.287
Cables
Computer cable ELPKC02 (1.8 m - for mini D-sub 15-pin/mini D-Sub
15pin)
Computer cable ELPKC09 (3 m - for mini D-sub 15-pin/mini D-Sub
15pin)
Computer cable ELPKC10 (20 m - for mini D-sub 15-pin/mini D-Sub
15pin)
Use when connecting to the Computer port.
Component video cable ELPKC19 (3 m - for mini D-Sub 15-pin/RCA male
x 3)
Use when connecting to a component video source.
Remote Control Cable Set ELPKC28
Use when connecting multiple projectors that support the interactive
feature.
Mounts
Setting plate ELPMB46
Use when installing the projector on a wall.
Ceiling mount ELPMB23
Use when installing the projector on a ceiling.
Ceiling pipe (450 mm) ELPFP13
Ceiling pipe (700 mm) ELPFP14
Use when installing the projector on a high ceiling.
Interactive Table Mount ELPMB29
Use when installing the projector on a table.
a
Special expertise is required to suspend the projector from a ceiling.
Contact Epson for help.
For Interactive Feature
Interactive Pen ELPPN05A
Interactive Pen ELPPN05B
Use when operating the computer screen on the projection surface.
Replacement Hard Pen Tips ELPPS03
Replacement Soft Pen Tips ELPPS04
Replacement pen tips for the interactive pen.
For Wireless Connection
Wireless LAN module ELPAP10
Use this to project images from a computer via a wireless communication.
(Frequency band: 2.4GHz)
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts
287
External Devices
Document Camera ELPDC21/ELPDC13/ELPDC07
Use when projecting image such as books, OHP documents, or slides.
External Speaker ELPSP02
External self‑powered speaker.
Replacement Parts
Lamp unit ELPLP92
Use as a replacement for used lamps.
Air filter ELPAF45
Use as a replacement for used air filters.
Screen Size and Projection Distance
288
Check the table here to determine how far to place the projector from the
screen based on the size of the projected image.
A
Projection distance (cm)
B
Distance from the projector to the top of the screen (when mounting on a wall
or ceiling, or installing vertically) (cm)
Distance from the projector to the bottom of the screen (when placing on a
surface such as a desk) (cm)
C
Distance from the projector to the bottom of the screen (when mounting on a
wall or ceiling, or installing vertically) (cm)
Distance from the projector to the top of the screen (when placing on a surface
such as a desk) (cm)
D
Distance from the center of the lens to the rear of the projector (cm)
16:10 screen size
A B C
Minimum (Wide) to
Maximum (Tele)
Minimum
(Wide)
Minimum
(Wide)
70" 151 × 94 40.5 - 55.8 12.9 107.2
80" 172 × 108 46.7 - 64.3 15.7 123.4
90" 194 × 121 53.0 - 72.8 18.6 139.7
100" 215 × 135 59.3* 21.4 156.0
* Project using Wide (maximum zoom).
Supported Monitor Display Resolutions
289
The table here lists the compatible refresh rate and resolution for each
compatible video display format.
Component Signals (Analog RGB)
Signal Refresh rate (Hz) Resolution (dots)
VGA 60/72/75/85 640 × 480
SVGA 60/72/75/85 800 × 600
XGA 60/70/75/85 1024 × 768
WXGA 60 1280 × 768
60 1366 × 768
60/75/85 1280 × 800
WXGA+ 60/75/85 1440 × 900
WXGA++ 60 1600 × 900
SXGA 70/75/85 1152 × 864
60/75/85 1280 × 960
60/75/85 1280 × 1024
SXGA+ 60/75 1400 × 1050
WSXGA+ * 60 1680 × 1050
UXGA 60 1600 × 1200
WUXGA (Reduced
Blanking)
60 1920 × 1200
* Only compatible when Wide is selected as the Resolution setting in the
projector's Signal menu.
Even when signals other than those mentioned above are input, it is likely that
the image can be projected. However, not all functions may be supported.
Component Video
Signal Refresh rate (Hz) Resolution (dots)
SDTV (480i/480p) 60 720 × 480
Signal Refresh rate (Hz) Resolution (dots)
SDTV (576i/576p) 50 720 × 576
HDTV (720p) 50/60 1280 × 720
HDTV (1080i) 50/60 1920 × 1080
Composite Video
Signal Refresh rate (Hz) Resolution (dots)
TV (NTSC) 60 720 × 480
TV (SECAM) 50 720 × 576
TV (PAL) 50/60 720 × 576
HDMI Input Signal
Signal Refresh rate (Hz) Resolution (dots)
VGA 60 640 × 480
SVGA 60 800 × 600
XGA 60 1024 × 768
WXGA 60 1280 × 800
60 1366 × 768
WXGA+ 60 1440 × 900
WXGA++ 60 1600 × 900
SXGA 60 1280 × 960
60 1280 × 1024
SXGA+ 60 1400 × 1050
WSXGA+ 60 1680 × 1050
UXGA 60 1600 × 1200
WUXGA (Reduced
Blanking)
60 1920 × 1200
SDTV (480i/480p) 60 720 × 480
Supported Monitor Display Resolutions
290
Signal Refresh rate (Hz) Resolution (dots)
SDTV (576i/576p) 50 720 × 576
HDTV (720p) 50/60 1280 × 720
HDTV (1080i) 50/60 1920 × 1080
HDTV (1080p) 24/30/50/60 1920 × 1080
MHL Input Signal
Signal Refresh rate (Hz) Resolution (dots)
VGA 60 640 × 480
SDTV (480i/480p) 60 720 × 480
SDTV (576i/576p) 50 720 × 576
HDTV (720p) 50/60 1280 × 720
HDTV (1080i) 50/60 1920 × 1080
HDTV (1080p) 24/30 1920 × 1080
Projector Specifications
291
Product name EB-1460Ui/EB-1450Ui/EB-1440Ui
Dimensions 474 (W) x 130(H) x 447(D) mm (not including raised
section)
LCD panel size 0.67"
Display method Poly-silicon TFT active matrix
Resolution 2,304,000 pixels
WUXGA (1,920 (W) x 1,200 (H) dots) x 3
Focus adjustment Manual
Zoom adjustment 1.0 - 1.35 (Digital Zoom)
Lamp EB-1460Ui:
UHE lamp, 300W Model No.: ELPLP92
EB-1450Ui/EB-1440Ui:
UHE lamp, 267W Model No.: ELPLP92
Lamp life Normal Power Consumption mode: Up to 5,000 hours
ECO Power Consumption mode: Up to 10,000 hours
Max. audio output 16W
Speaker 1
Power supply EB-1460Ui:
100-240V AC±10% 50/60Hz 4.8 - 2.1 A
EB-1450Ui/EB-1440Ui:
100-240V AC±10% 50/60Hz 4.3 - 1.9 A
Power
consumpt
ion
100 to 120 V
area
EB-1460Ui:
Operating: 477 W
Standby power consumption (Communication On):
2.88 W
Standby power consumption (Communication Off):
0.22 W
EB-1450Ui/EB-1440Ui:
Operating: 425 W
Standby power consumption (Communication On):
2.81 W
Standby power consumption (Communication Off):
0.23 W
220 to 240 V
area
EB-1460Ui:
Operating: 467 W
Standby power consumption (Communication On):
2.95 W
Standby power consumption (Communication Off):
0.32 W
EB-1450Ui/EB-1440Ui:
Operating: 401 W
Standby power consumption (Communication On):
2.87 W
Standby power consumption (Communication Off):
0.32 W
Operating altitude Altitude 0 to 3,000 m
Operating temperature
+5 to +40°C* (No condensation) (Altitude 0 to 2,286 m)
+5 to +35°C* (No condensation) (Altitude 2,287 to
3,000 m)
When using multiple projectors at the same time:
+5 to +35°C* (No condensation) (Altitude 0 to 2,286 m)
+5 to +30°C* (No condensation) (Altitude 2,287 to
3,000 m)
Storage temperature -10 to +60°C (No condensation)
Projector Specifications
292
Mass EB-1460Ui:
Approx. 8.5 kg
EB-1450Ui/EB-1440Ui:
Approx. 8.4 kg
* If the surrounding temperature gets too high, the brightness is automatically
dimmed.
This product is also designed for IT power distribution system with phase-to-
phase voltage 230V.
Angle of tilt
If you use the projector tilted at an angle of more than 3˚ it could be damaged
and cause an accident.
Connector Specifications
293
Computer port 1 Mini D-Sub15-pin (female)
Monitor Out port 1 Mini D-Sub15-pin (female)
Video port 1 RCA pin jack
Audio port 2 stereo mini pin jack
Audio Out port 1 stereo mini pin jack
HDMI1/MHL port 1 HDMI (Audio is only supported by
PCM)
HDMI2 port 1 HDMI (Audio is only supported by
PCM)
DVI-D Out port 1 DVI-D 24pin Single link
USB-A port 2 USB connector (Type A)
USB-B port 1 USB connector (Type B)
USB port (for Wireless
LAN module)
1 USB connector (Type A)
LAN port 1 RJ-45
RS-232C port 1 Mini D-Sub 9-pin (male)
SYNC port 2 Stereo mini pin jack
TCH port (EB-
1460Ui/EB-1450Ui)
1 Mini DIN 8-pin
Remote port 1 Stereo mini pin jack
a
• USB-A and USB-B port supports USB 2.0. However, USB ports are
not guaranteed to operate all devices that support USB.
• USB-B port is not support USB 1.1.
External Dimensions
294
A
Center of the lens
B
Distance from the top to the ceiling mount fixing points
The unit in these illustrations is mm.
Without feet
External Dimensions
295
With feet
USB Display System Requirements
296
To use the projector's Epson USB Display software, your computer must meet
the following system requirements.
Requirement Windows Mac
Operating system Windows Vista
• Ultimate (32-bit)
• Enterprise (32-bit)
• Business (32-bit)
• Home Premium (32-bit)
• Home Basic (32-bit)
OS X
• 10.7.x (32- and 64-bit)
• 10.8.x (64-bit)
• 10.9.x (64-bit)
• 10.10.x (64-bit)
• 10.11.x (64-bit)
Windows 7
• Ultimate (32- and 64-bit)
• Enterprise (32- and 64-bit)
• Professional (32- and 64-bit)
• Home Premium (32- and 64-
bit)
• Home Basic (32-bit)
• Starter (32-bit)
macOS
• 10.12.x (64-bit)
• 10.13.x (64-bit)
Windows 8.1
• Windows 8.1 (32- and 64-bit)
• Windows 8.1 Pro (32- and 64-
bit)
• Windows 8.1 Enterprise (32-
and 64-bit)
Windows 10
• Windows 10 Home (32- and
64-bit)
• Windows 10 Pro (32- and 64-
bit)
• Windows 10 Enterprise (32-
and 64-bit)
CPU Intel Core2Duo or faster
(Intel Core i3 or faster
recommended)
Intel Core2Duo or faster
(Intel Core i5 or faster
recommended)
Requirement Windows Mac
Memory 2GB or more
(4GB or more recommended)
Hard disk space 20 MB or more
Display Resolution between 640 × 480 and 1920 × 1200
16-bit color or greater
a
Operation is not guaranteed for Windows Vista without any service
packs installed, or Windows Vista Service Pack 1.
Easy Interactive Driver System Requirements
297
To use computer interactive mode, you must install the Easy Interactive
Driver on your computer. Check the system requirements necessary to run
the software.
Requirement Windows Mac
Operating system Windows 7
• Ultimate (32- and 64-bit)
• Enterprise (32- and 64-bit)
• Professional (32- and 64-bit)
• Home Premium (32- and 64-
bit)
• Home Basic (32-bit)
OS X
• OS X 10.7.x (32- and 64-
bit)
• OS X 10.8.x (64-bit)
• OS X 10.9.x (64-bit)
• OS X 10.10.x (64-bit)
• OS X 10.11.x (64-bit)
macOS
• 10.12.x (64-bit)
• 10.13.x (64-bit)
Windows 8
• Windows 8 (32- and 64-bit)
• Windows 8 Pro (32- and 64-
bit)
• Windows 8 Enterprise (32-
and 64-bit)
Windows 8.1
• Windows 8.1 (32- and 64-bit)
• Windows 8.1 Pro (32- and 64-
bit)
• Windows 8.1 Enterprise (32-
and 64-bit)
Windows 10
• Windows 10 Home (32- and
64-bit)
• Windows 10 Pro (32- and 64-
bit)
• Windows 10 Enterprise (32-
and 64-bit)
CPU Core2 Duo 1.2 GHz or faster
(Core i3 or faster recommended)
Core2 Duo 1.2 GHz or faster
(Core i5 or faster
recommended)
Requirement Windows Mac
Memory 1 GB or more
Recommended: 2 GB or more
1 GB or more
Recommended: 2 GB or more
Hard disk space 100 MB or more 100 MB or more
Display Resolutions no lower than XGA
(1024 x 768) and no higher than
WUXGA (1920 x 1200)
16-bit color or greater
Resolutions no lower than
XGA (1024 x 768) and no
higher than WUXGA (1920 x
1200)
16-bit color or greater
List of Safety Symbols (corresponding to IEC60950-1 A2)
298
The following table lists the meaning of the safety symbols labeled on the
equipment.
No. Symbol mark Approved
standards
Description
A
IEC60417
No.5007
"ON" (power)
To indicate connection to the mains.
B
IEC60417
No.5008
"OFF" (power)
To indicate disconnection from the
mains.
C
IEC60417
No.5009
Stand-by
To identify the switch or switch
position by means of which part of the
equipment is switched on in order to
bring it into the stand-by condition.
D
ISO7000
No.0434B,
IEC3864-B3.1
Caution
To identify general caution when
using the product.
E
IEC60417
No.5041
Caution, hot surface
To indicate that the marked item can
be hot and should not be touched
without taking care.
F
IEC60417
No.6042
ISO3864-B3.6
Caution, risk of electric shock
To identify equipment that has risk of
electric shock.
G
IEC60417
No.5957
For indoor use only
To identify electrical equipment
designed primarily for indoor use.
H
IEC60417
No.5926
Polarity of d.c. power connector
To identify the positive and negative
connections (the polarity) on a piece
of equipment to which a d.c. power
supply may be connected.
No. Symbol mark Approved
standards
Description
I
— The same as No.8.
J
IEC60417
No.5001B
Battery, general
On battery powered equipment. To
identify a device for instance a cover
for the battery compartment, or the
connector terminals.
K
IEC60417
No.5002
Positioning of cell
To identify the battery holder itself
and to identify the positioning of the
cell(s) inside the battery holder.
L
— The same as No.11.
M
IEC60417
No.5019
Protective earth
To identify any terminal which is
intended for connection to an external
conductor for protection against
electric shock in case of a fault, or the
terminal of a protective earth
electrode.
N
IEC60417
No.5017
Earth
To identify an earth (ground) terminal
in cases where neither the symbol
No.13 is explicitly required.
O
IEC60417
No.5032
Alternating current
To indicate on the rating plate that the
equipment is suitable for alternating
current only; to identify relevant
terminals.
P
IEC60417
No.5031
Direct current
To indicate on the rating plate that the
equipment is suitable for direct
current only; to identify relevant
terminals.
List of Safety Symbols (corresponding to IEC60950-1 A2)
299
No. Symbol mark Approved
standards
Description
Q
IEC60417
No.5172
Class II equipment
To identify equipment meeting the
safety requirements specified for Class
II equipment according to IEC 61140.
R
ISO 3864 General prohibition
To identify actions or operations that
are prohibited.
S
ISO 3864 Contact prohibition
To indicate injury that could occur
due to touching a specific part of the
equipment.
T
— Never look into the optical lens while
the projector is on.
U
— To indicate that the marked item don’t
place anything on projector.
V
ISO3864
IEC60825-1
Caution, laser radiation
To indicate the equipment has a laser
radiation part.
W
ISO 3864 Disassembly prohibition
To indicate a risk of injury, such as
electric shock, if the equipment is
disassembled.
X
IEC60417
No. 5266
Standby, partial standby
To indicate that part of the equipment
is in the ready status.
Y
ISO3864
IEC60417
No. 5057
Caution, movable parts
To indicate that you must keep away
from movable parts according to
protection standards.
Glossary
300
This section briefly explains the difficult terms that are not explained in the
text of this guide. For details, refer to other commercially available
publications.
AMX Device
Discovery
AMX Device Discovery is a technology developed by AMX to
facilitate AMX control systems for easy operation of the target
equipment.
Epson have implemented this protocol technology, and have
provided a setting to enable the protocol function (ON).
See the AMX Web site for more details.
URL http://www.amx.com/
Aspect Ratio The ratio between an image's length and its height.
Screens with a horizontal:vertical ratio of 16:9, such as HDTV
screens, are known as wide screens.
SDTV and general computer displays have an aspect ratio of
4:3.
Component Video A method that separates the video signal into a luminance
component (Y), and a blue minus luminance (Cb or Pb) and a
red minus luminance (Cr or Pr).
Composite Video A method that combines the video signal into a luminance
component and a color component for transmission down a
single cable.
Contrast The relative brightness of the light and dark areas of an image
can be increased or decreased to make text and graphics stand
out more clearly, or to make them appear softer. Adjusting this
particular property of an image is called contrast adjustment.
DHCP An abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, this
protocol automatically assigns an IP address to equipment
connected to a network.
DICOM An acronym for Digital Imaging and Communications in
Medicine.
An international standard that defines image standards and a
communications protocol for medical images.
Gateway Address This is a server (router) for communicating across a network
(subnet) divided according to subnet mask.
HDCP HDCP is an abbreviation for High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection.
It is used to prevent illegal copying and protect copyrights by
encrypting digital signals sent over DVI and HDMI ports.
Because the HDMI port on this projector supports HDCP, it
can project digital images protected by HDCP technology.
However, the projector may not be able to project images
protected with updated or revised versions of HDCP
encryption.
HDMI
™
An abbreviation for High Definition Multimedia Interface.
HDMI
™
is a standard aimed at digital consumer electronics and
computers. This is the standard by which HD images and
multichannel audio signals are digitally transmitted.
By not compressing the digital signal, the image can be
transferred at the highest quality possible. It also provides an
encryption function for the digital signal.
HDTV An abbreviation for High-Definition Television that refers to
high-definition systems which satisfy the following conditions:
• Vertical resolution of 720p or 1080i or greater (p =
Progressive, i = Interlace)
• Screen aspect ratio of 16:9
Infrastructure
mode
A method for wireless LAN connection in which devices
communicate through access points.
Interlace Transmits information needed to create one screen by sending
every other line, starting from the top of the image and working
down to the bottom.
Images are more likely to flicker because one frame is displayed
every other line.
IP Address A number to identify a computer connected to a network.
MHL An abbreviation for Mobile High-definition Link, which is a
standard high-definition interface that enables high-speed
transfer of video signals on mobile devices.
It is a standard targeting smartphones and tablets that transfers
uncompressed digital signals without loss of quality and also
enables simultaneous charging of such devices.
Glossary
301
Progressive Projects information to create one screen at a time, displaying
the image for one frame.
Even though the number of scan lines is the same, the amount
of flicker in images decreases because the volume of
information has doubled compared with an interlace system.
Refresh Rate The light-emitting element of a display maintains the same
luminosity and color for an extremely short time.
Because of this, the image must be scanned many times per
second to refresh the light-emitting element.
The number of refresh operations per second is called the
Refresh rate and is expressed in hertz (Hz).
SDTV An abbreviation for Standard Definition Television that refers
to standard television systems which do not satisfy the
conditions for HDTV High-Definition Television.
SNMP An abbreviation for Simple Network Management Protocol,
which is the protocol for monitoring and controlling devices
such as routers and computers connected to a TCP/IP network.
sRGB An international standard for color intervals that was
formulated so that colors that are reproduced by video
equipment can be handled easily by computer operating
systems (OS) and the Internet. If the connected source has an
sRGB mode, set both the projector and the connected signal
source to sRGB.
SSID SSID is identification data for connecting to another device on
a wireless LAN. Wireless communication is possible between
devices with the same SSID.
Subnet Mask This is a numerical value that defines the number of bits used
for the network address on a divided network (subnet) from the
IP address.
SVGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 800 (horizontal) ×
600 (vertical) dots.
SXGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 1,280 (horizontal) ×
1,024 (vertical) dots.
Sync. The signals output from computers have a specific frequency.
If the projector frequency does not match this frequency, the
resulting images are not of a good quality.
The process of matching the phases of these signals (the relative
position of the crests and the troughs in the signal) is called
Synchronization.
If the signals are not synchronized, flickering, blurriness, and
horizontal interference occur.
Tracking The signals output from computers have a specific frequency.
If the projector frequency does not match this frequency, the
resulting images are not of a good quality.
The process of matching the frequency of these signals (the
number of crests in the signal) is called Tracking.
If Tracking is not carried out correctly, wide vertical stripes
appear in the signal.
Trap IP Address This is the IP address for the destination computer used for
error notification in SNMP.
VGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 640 (horizontal) ×
480 (vertical) dots.
XGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 1,024 (horizontal) ×
768 (vertical) dots.
WXGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 1,280 (horizontal) ×
800 (vertical) dots.
WUXGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 1,920 (horizontal) ×
1,200 (vertical) dots.
Notices
302
Check these sections for important notices about your projector.
gg Related Links
• "FCC Compliance Statement" p.302
• "Indication of the manufacturer and the importer in accordance with
requirements of EU directive" p.303
• "Restriction of Use" p.303
• "Operating System References" p.303
• "Trademarks" p.303
• "Copyright Notice" p.304
• "Copyright Attribution" p.304
FCC Compliance Statement
DECLARATION of CONFORMITY
According to 47CFR, Part 2 and 15
Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals; and/or
CPU Boards and Power Supplies used with Class B Personal Computers
We: Epson America, Inc.
Located at: 3840 Kilroy Airport Way MS: 3-13 Long Beach, CA 90806
Tel: 562-981-3840
Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein, complies
with 47CFR Part 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital device. Each
product marketed, is identical to the representative unit tested and found to
be compliant with the standards. Records maintained continue to reflect the
equipment being produced can be expected to be within the variation
accepted, due to quantity production and testing on a statistical basis as
required by 47CFR 2.909. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions : (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Trade Name: EPSON
Type of Product: LCD Projector
Model: H726C/H727C/H771C
FCC Compliance Statement For United States Users
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio and television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures.
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
WARNING
The connection of a non-shielded equipment interface cable to this
equipment will invalidate the FCC Certification or Declaration of this device
and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits established by the
FCC for this equipment. It is the responsibility of the user to obtain and use a
shielded equipment interface cable with this device. If this equipment has
more than one interface connector, do not leave cables connected to unused
interfaces. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Since the Easy Interactive Pen is small, FCC Statement for Verification is
written in the manual.
FCC Statement for Verification
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Notices
303
Indication of the manufacturer and the importer in
accordance with requirements of EU directive
Manufacturer: SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION
Address: 3-5, Owa 3-chome, Suwa-shi, Nagano-ken 392-8502 Japan
Telephone: 81-266-52-3131
http://www.epson.com/
Importer: EPSON EUROPE B.V.
Address: Atlas Arena, Asia Building, Hoogoorddreef 5,1101 BA Amsterdam
Zuidoost
The Netherlands
Telephone: 31-20-314-5000
http://www.epson.eu/
Restriction of Use
When this product is used for applications requiring high reliability/safety
such as transportation devices related to aviation, rail, marine, automotive
etc.; disaster prevention devices; various safety devices etc; or
functional/precision devices etc, you should use this product only after giving
consideration to including fail-safes and redundancies into your design to
maintain safety and total system reliability. Because this product was not
intended for use in applications requiring extremely high reliability/safety
such as aerospace equipment, main communication equipment, nuclear
power control equipment, or medical equipment related to direct medical care
etc, please make your own judgment on this product’s suitability after a full
evaluation.
Operating System References
• Microsoft
®
Windows Vista
®
operating system
• Microsoft
®
Windows
®
7 operating system
• Microsoft
®
Windows
®
8 operating system
• Microsoft
®
Windows
®
8.1 operating system
• Microsoft
®
Windows
®
10 operating system
• Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2008 operating system
• Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2012 operating system
• Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2016 operating system
In this guide, the operating systems above are referred to as "Windows Vista",
"Windows 7", "Windows 8", "Windows 8.1", "Windows 10", "Windows Server
2008", "Windows Server 2012", and "Windows Server 2016". Furthermore, the
collective term "Windows" is used to refer to them all.
• OS X 10.7.x
• OS X 10.8.x
• OS X 10.9.x
• OS X 10.10.x
• OS X 10.11.x
• macOS 10.12.x
• macOS 10.13.x
In this guide, the operating systems above are referred to as "OS X 10.7.x", "OS
X 10.8.x", "OS X 10.9.x", "OS X 10.10.x", "OS X 10.11.x", "macOS 10.12.x", and
"macOS 10.13.x". Furthermore, the collective term "Mac" is used to refer to
them all.
Trademarks
EPSON is a registered trademark, EXCEED YOUR VISION, ELPLP and their
logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Mac, Mac OS, OS X, and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, PowerPoint, Excel,
and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Notices
304
WPA
™
, WPA2
™
, and Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi
Alliance.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
Google Play is a trademark of Google Inc.
HDMI and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are the trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
MHL, the MHL logo, and Mobile High-Definition Link are the trademarks or
registered trademarks of MHL and LLC in the United States and/or other
countries.
"QR Code" is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
PJLink trademark is a trademark applied for registration or is already
registered in Japan, the United States of America and other countries and
areas.
Foxit PDF SDK Copyright ©2011, Foxit Software Company
www.foxitsoftware.com, All rights reserved.
Crestron
®
and Crestron RoomView
®
are registered trademarks of Crestron
Electronics, Inc.
Ubuntu and Canonical are registered trademarks of Canonical Ltd.
Intel
®
is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other
countries.
Miracast
™
and Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
are trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
This product includes RSA BSAFE
TM
software from RSA Security Inc. RSA is a
registered trademark of RSA Security Inc. BSAFE is a registered trademark of
RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
Eneloop
®
is a registered trademark of the Panasonic Group.
Other product names used herein are also for identification purposes only
and may be trademarks of their respective owners. Epson disclaims any and
all rights in those marks.
Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Seiko Epson Corporation. No patent liability is assumed with
respect to the use of the information contained herein. Neither is any liability
assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained
herein.
Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the
purchaser of this product or third parties for damages, losses, costs, or
expenses incurred by the purchaser or third parties as a result of: accident,
misuse, or abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs, or
alterations to this product, or (excluding the U.S.) failure to strictly comply
with Seiko Epson Corporation's operating and maintenance instructions.
Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be liable against any damages or problems
arising from the use of any options or any consumable products other than
those designated as Original Epson Products or Epson Approved Products by
Seiko Epson Corporation.
The contents of this guide may be changed or updated without further notice.
Illustrations in this guide and the actual projector may differ.
Copyright Attribution
This information is subject to change without notice.
©SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION 2017. All rights reserved.
2017.12 413552600EN
… 5 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Epson EB1460Ui bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Epson EB1460Ui in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 9,15 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Epson EB1460Ui

Epson EB1460Ui Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 319 pagina's

Epson EB1460Ui Snelstart handleiding - Alle talen - 12 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info